ML18142A136: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
(3 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown)
Line 18: Line 18:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:.:
{{#Wiki_filter:FOR REF ERENCE    r:~i f :RY OP-4. 3 Page 1 of 76
* FOR REF ER ENCE r:~i f :RY OP-4. 3 1.0 References VIRGINIA ELECTRIC AND POWER COMPANY SURRY POWER STATION UNIT NO. 1 AND 2 SHIPPING OF SPENT FUEL TN-BL SHIPPING CASK LOADING AND HANDLING PROCEDURES  
.:                        VIRGINIA ELECTRIC AND POWER COMPANY SURRY POWER STATION UNIT NO. 1 AND 2 NO\J 4: 1983 SHIPPING OF SPENT FUEL TN-BL SHIPPING CASK LOADING AND HANDLING PROCEDURES 1.0  References 1.1  Operating Manual, TN-SL Spent Fuel Cask Operations 1.2  NUREG 0612 Heavy Loads 2.0  Purpose 2.1  This procedure outlines the methods of receipt, placement in the Spent Fuel Pool, loading Spent Fuel, Removal from Spent Fuel Pool, decontamination, dryness verification, Integrity Testing and shipment of the TN-BL Spent Fuel Shipping Cask.
1.1.1    Unloading Cask from truck 1.1.2    Prepa*ration of Cask for loading spent fuel 1.1.3    Cask loading 1.1.4    Preparation of Cask for departure
(~-s41212oa-soa4iiao----~
l I
PDR ADOCK 05000280 p                PDR  -


===1.1 Operating===
r~,
                            ~ ~,r~                                OP-4.3 Page 2 of 76 NO\J 4. 1983 3.0 Initial Conditions 3.1. The cask has arrived at Secur~ty Gate.
3.2  Security has notified Health Physics and Operations of Cask arrival.
3.3  Security has verified seals have not been tampered with and recorded Seal Numbers.
3 .4  QC has been notified.
3.5  Fuel Building Roll-up Doors and Decon Bldg. North access hatch at operating deck of Fuel Building are accessible.
3.6  The water level in the Spent Fuel Pool is at less than maximum.
3.7  A current Fuel Storage Area map is available.
3.8  Health Physics has performed its initial Radiation Survey at the gate and is prepared for the Cask to be brought on Station.
3.9  The Spent Fuel Handling Tool is available. The Spent Fuel Cask Handling Crane, and th Fuel Pit Bridge Crane, are operable. Also, hand tools are provided in storage boxes outside, in Decon. Bldg. and in Fuel Building.
3.10  Portable underwater lighting in Spent Fuel Pool is available.
3.11  A VNF-7 Form has been initiated and approved for shipment of Fuel from Surry Power Station and Fuel Assembly and device History Sheets are available.
3.12  The Cask Service Equipment, Utilities, and special tools are on hand and operable.


Manual, TN-SL Spent Fuel Cask Operations
OP-4.3 Page 3 of 76 NOV 4: 1983 3.0 Initial Conditions (continued) 3.13  Health Physics Coverage available for Cask Handling Operation
* per the applicable H.P. Procedures and Radiation Work Permit.
3.14  Area prepared and accessible to Crane for lifting beams.
3.15  Access to Fuel Building via the stairwell between the Fuel Bldg. and Decon. Bldg. is made available during operation.
3.16  The Crane hook, block and cables are clean and lubricated.
3.17  Personnel involved have been instructed in the proper use of tools and equipment utilized.
3.18  The continuous Radiation Monitoring System of the Fuel Bldg.
is in service, and air activity*i.s being continuously f .
monitored.
3.19  Decon Bldg. ventilation in operation.
3.20  Condensate Water Supply and hoses are available at Spent Fuel Pool to wash down Cask upon leaving water.
3.21  Spent Fuel Data has been obtained from Fuel Resources and is on copy of Cask Loading Report. Cask Loading Report to be provided by Surry Power Station and transmitted with the shipment.
: 3. 21.1  Spent Fuel Shipment Number 3.21.2    Spent Fuel Assembly Serial Number and Insert Number.
: 3. 21. 3  Spent Fuel Location within the Cask 3 .21.4  Decay Heat content (KW) 3.21.5    Total Activity of Element (CURIES) 3.21.6    Weight of Fissile Uranium (GRAMS)
: 3. 21. 7  Weight of Fissile Plutonium (GRAMS)


===1.2 NUREG===
OP-4.3 l~rtr                Page 4 of 76 ltd eu.i.,            NOV 4 1983
0612 Heavy Loads 2.0 Purpose Page 1 of 76 NO\J 4: 1983 2.1 This procedure outlines the methods of receipt, placement in the Spent Fuel Pool, loading Spent Fuel, Removal from Spent Fuel Pool, decontamination, dryness verification, Integrity Testing and shipment of the TN-BL Spent Fuel Shipping Cask. 1.1.1 Unloading Cask from truck 1.1.2 Prepa*ration of Cask for loading spent fuel 1.1.3 Cask loading 1.1.4 Preparation of Cask for departure l (~-s41212oa-soa4iiao----~
* 3.0 Initial Conditions (continued) 3.22  A Supervisor from Operations will be in charge of fuel movements in order to certify the proper records are completed and to ensure a smooth evolution.
PDR ADOCK 05000280 . I p PDR -' 
3.23  Fuel Resources Personnel will be notified prior to any fuel movements.
3.24  The Transportation Documents have been received from tlie carrier and are in good order.
3.25  All fuel assemblies stored in Region 1 (SfSA rows 31 through
: 48) of the Surry spent fuel pool are on the most recent revision of the "Surry Region l Fuel Eligibility List".
3.26  Auxiliary cask handling equipment has been tested in accordance with ANSI Nl4.6
* OP-4.3 Page 5 of 76 NOV 4  1983 4.0 Precautions and Limitations 4.1   All Fuel Handling Equipment will have been tested prior to handling the shipping Cask and Fuel Assemblies.
4.2   Positive and accurate records will be maintained at all times.
4.3   Cask shall not be moved outdoors when threat of severe weather disturbance exists.
4.4  Slings, shackles, and cables shall be checked to verify that they appear to be in good working order.
4.5  The cask and all handling tools and equipment are massive and heavy. Many pinch point hazards exist. A very slow swing of the suspended cask will contain a large amount of energy. Be careful in the cask equipment moves.
4.6  The Cask in the upright position is sixteen (16) feet high, which constitutes a fall hazard. Improper rigging can cause a cask or equipment drop.
4.7  The surface of a loaded cask at equilibrium may be uncomfortably hot.
4.8  It is imperative that the cask handling crew be thoroughly familiar with cask equipment, potential hazards and proper handling procedure. Also, all safety rules and equipment are available to perform all areas of cask handling safely.
4.9  All  personnel in Fuel Building, taking part or observing work, shall be familiar with Station Emergency Plan and AP for Fuel Failure
* r-* * ~,
Ii~~-
OP-4.3 Page 6 of 76 NOV 4 1983 4.0 Precautions and Limitations (continued) 4 .10 - Car-e should be taken to keep the skirt inlet and vent hoses as short as possible.        Excessive lengths may result in interference problems.        The hoses should be allowed to hang freely but not allowed to become entangled.
4.11    Thorough planning should be done prior to cask immersion to ensure that immersion times are minimized.        Normally, the shorter the immersion time, the less severe the contamination problems incurred and associated decontamination efforts.
4.12    Do not allow Cask to dry prior to decontamination.
4.13    Operation of the Fuel Building Bridge and Trolley Crane will be accomplished by qualified crane operators.
4.14    Safety belts will be worn by personnel as necessary to
* prevent falling into Spent Fuel Pool.
4.15    All hand tools used over Spent Fuel Pool or Cask Area will have lines attached to prevent their dropping into the pool.
4.16    When fuel handling is in progress, all doors will be shut in the Spent Fuel Building, except for the movement of people or equipment.
4.17    Prior to moving Fuel Building Bridge Crane into the vicinity of the Cask Area, ensure cask crane has been moved clear so as not to obstruct the path of the bridge crane.


===3.0 Initial===
                                      !? ~:*-~;~~*~t~*;' ?~~;
Conditions r~, ~,r~ 3.1. The cask has arrived at Secur~ty Gate. OP-4.3 Page 2 of 76 NO\J 4. 1983 3.2 Security has notified Health Physics and Operations of Cask arrival. 3.3 Security has verified seals have not been tampered with and recorded Seal Numbers. 3 .4 QC has been notified.
a:!:.:.u ~uti,_.tJ ~t~.....
3.5 Fuel Building Roll-up Doors and Decon Bldg. North access hatch at operating deck of Fuel Building are accessible.
OP-4.3
3.6 The water level in the Spent Fuel Pool is at less than maximum. 3.7 A current Fuel Storage Area map is available.  
                                                                  "'-'*-~*r..c      Page 7 of 76 NOV 4 1983
* 4.0 Precautions and Limitations (continued) 4.18- Whenever the lifting beam or special service tools are being moved underwater, at least one person other than the man controlling or directing the crane movement, must be observing the lifting beam or service equipment.                  The lifting beam or service equipment shall.not be moved when visibility problems obscure their underwater movement.
4.19  DELETE 4.20  Avoid excessive "jerky" motion of crane when carrying fuel.
4.21  When handling fuel, the fuel handling tool should be supported by hand, to prevent.unnecessary swinging action.
4.22  Move trolley and bridge smoothly when moving fuel.
4.23  Insure the locking device is in place prior to lifing fuel assembly.
4.24  Always ensure adequate clearance exists between the top of the Fuel Assembly Storage Racks and the bottom of the Fuel Assembly prior to moving fuel horizontally in pool, and when placing Fuel Assembly over the shipping cask.
4.25  Minimum allowable depth of water between top of Spent Fuel and surface of water is 8 feet while moving fuel.
4.26  Minimize axial loadipg during the last few inches of travel when setting an assembly down or attaching a handling tool by jogging the crane at minimum possible speed
* OP-4.3 Page 8 o'f 76 NOV 4  1983 4.0 Precautions and Limitations (continued)
: 4. 27. *. -The Fuel Building Bridge Crane should be parked over the new Fuel Storage Area and the power supply disconnect switch shall be open and padlocked with an Administrative Control Lock whenever it is not in use.
4.28      Any fuel assembly movement will be proceeded by Form VNF-7 issued from the Refueling Office with the Superintendent of Operations approval signature affixed for fuel assembly position changes.
4.29      In the event of anything abnormal occurring during operations, stop and have situation evaluated by the Supervisor
* OP-4.3 Page 9 of 76
                                            ,:,~r                  NOV 4  1983
                                            .  '  . . ? U_.,
                                                  ~'F~
Procedure (continued) 5.1  Unloading Cask From Truck 5 .1.1  Initial conditions are noted and satisfied.
5 .1.2  Precautions and Limitations as noted.
5.1.3.1    Release the tarpaulin in tie-down along the sides of the trailer by pulling the elastic tie-down ropes from the trailers tie-down hooks.
5.1.3.2    Release the trailer rear tarpaulin section by unbuckling the leather straps along each side of the tarpaulin releasing the bottom bf the tarpaulin.
5.1.3.3    Roll-up the rear tarpaulin section and secure it in this position by placing the straps around the tarpaulin and buckling the straps to the tarpaulin roof section
* OP-4.3 Page 10 of 76 t*"''f'J k i'..:.i~
NOV 4  1983
~ 5.0 Pro*cedure (continued) 5.1    Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.3.4          Slide the enclosure forward by having one man at ground level on each side of the trailer grasp the side section of the tarpaulin and pull it towards the front of the trailer (this will result in sliding the roller mechanism forward).
Slide the enclosure until the tarpaulin is drawn as far as possible against the front of the enclosure. A rope and pulley are also located on the inside of
* the trailer front wall to assist in pulling the tarpaulin forward. The mechanism can then be locked in place by the pin locks on the rails.
NOTE:    If it is undesirable to limit the cask or cover lift height during removal from the trailer, the lengths of the slide mechanism roller tracks may be removed between the track support posts.       This removal is done by retracting the spring loaded pins from the ends of the track and removing the track section.
NOTE:    Steps in the: "Loading Procedure", marked by an asterisk(*), indicate information is required to be entered on the referenced form or report .


===3.8 Health===
OP-4.3 Page 11 of 76 NOV 4 1983
Physics has performed its initial Radiation Survey at the gate and is prepared for the Cask to be brought on Station. 3.9 The Spent Fuel Handling Tool is available.
~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1  Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)
The Spent Fuel Cask Handling Crane, and th Fuel Pit Bridge Crane, are operable.
            *5 .1.4  Perform Cask and Trailer Radiation Surveys and Record Data on "Cask Receipt Radiation Survey".
Also, hand tools are provided in storage boxes outside, in Decon. Bldg. and in Fuel Building.
Complete the Survey Forms and retain for documentation requirements. This is performed and document by Station Health Physics Department.
3.10 Portable underwater lighting in Spent Fuel Pool is available.
5.1.5   Health Physics requirements should be checked to determine if protective clothing (e.g. gloves) are required.
3.11 A VNF-7 Form has been initiated and approved for shipment of Fuel from Surry Power Station and Fuel Assembly and device History Sheets are available.
            *5 .1. 6 Remove Security Seals. (Seals on front and back shock absorbing covers). Remove seals.
3.12 The Cask Service Equipment, Utilities, and special tools are on hand and operable.
5 .1. 7  Remove (6) trunnion impact limiters per the following instructions:  (two on lower end of cask, four on upper end of cask). See figure 2, Attachment 1.
3.0 OP-4.3 Page 3 of 76 NOV 4: 1983 Initial Conditions (continued) 3.13 Health Physics Coverage available for Cask Handling Operation
Required Equipment Waterproof Tape Ratchet 13/16 inch socket Ratchet drive extension 50 ft. tape measure
* per the applicable H.P. Procedures and Radiation Work Permit. 3.14 Area prepared and accessible to Crane for lifting beams. 3.15 Access to Fuel Building via the stairwell between the Fuel Bldg. and Decon. Bldg. is made available during operation.
3.16 The Crane hook, block and cables are clean and lubricated.
3.17 Personnel involved have been instructed in the proper use of tools and equipment utilized.
3.18 The continuous Radiation Monitoring System of the Fuel Bldg. is in service, and air activity*i.s being continuously f . monitored.
3.19 Decon Bldg. ventilation in operation.
3.20 Condensate Water Supply and hoses are available at Spent Fuel Pool to wash down Cask upon leaving water. 3.21 Spent Fuel Data has been obtained from Fuel Resources and is on copy of Cask Loading Report. Cask Loading Report to be provided by Surry Power Station and transmitted with the shipment.
: 3. 21.1 Spent Fuel Shipment Number 3.21.2 Spent Fuel Assembly Serial Number and Insert Number. 3. 21. 3 Spent Fuel Location within the Cask 3 .21.4 Decay Heat content (KW) 3.21.5 Total Activity of Element (CURIES) 3.21.6 Weight of Fissile Uranium (GRAMS) 3. 21. 7 Weight of Fissile Plutonium (GRAMS)
* 3.0
* l~rtr ltd eu.i., Initial Conditions (continued) 3.22 A Supervisor from Operations will be in charge of fuel movements in order to certify the proper records are completed and to ensure a smooth evolution.
OP-4.3 Page 4 of 76 NOV 4 1983 3.23 Fuel Resources Personnel will be notified prior to any fuel movements.
3.24 The Transportation Documents have been received from tlie carrier and are in good order. 3.25 All fuel assemblies stored in Region 1 (SfSA rows 31 through 48) of the Surry spent fuel pool are on the most recent revision of the "Surry Region l Fuel Eligibility List". 3.26 Auxiliary cask handling equipment has been tested in accordance with ANSI Nl4.6 *
* 4.0
* OP-4.3 Page 5 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Precautions and Limitations 4.1 All Fuel Handling Equipment will have been tested prior to handling the shipping Cask and Fuel Assemblies.  


===4.2 Positive===
OP-4.3 Page 12 of 76 NOV 4 1983
and accurate records will be maintained at all times. 4.3 Cask shall not be moved outdoors when threat of severe weather disturbance exists. 4.4 Slings, shackles, and cables shall be checked to verify that they appear to be in good working order. 4.5 The cask and all handling tools and equipment are massive and heavy. Many pinch point hazards exist. A very slow swing of the suspended cask will contain a large amount of energy. Be careful in the cask equipment moves. 4.6 The Cask in the upright position is sixteen (16) feet high, which constitutes a fall hazard. Improper rigging can cause a cask or equipment drop. 4.7 The surface of a loaded cask at equilibrium may be uncomfortably hot. 4.8 It is imperative that the cask handling crew be thoroughly familiar with cask equipment, potential hazards and proper handling procedure.
~          5.0    Procedure (continued) 5.1  Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)
Also, all safety rules and equipment are available to perform all areas of cask handling safely. 4.9 All personnel in Fuel Building, taking part or observing work, shall be familiar with Station Emergency Plan and AP for Fuel Failure *
Trunnion
* 4.0 r-* **~, Ii~~-Precautions and Limitations (continued)
#1  #2  #3  #4 #5  #6 5.1.7.1    Remove the limiter 9/16" bolt.
OP-4.3 Page 6 NOV 4 4 .10 -Car-e should be taken to keep the skirt inlet and vent hoses as short as possible.
NOTE:    As the bolt is removed, manually restrain the trunnion impact limiter (approximate weight of a trunnion impact limiter is 45 lbs).
Excessive lengths may result in interference problems.
5.1.7.2    When the bolt is removed, remove the trunnion impact limiter from the i
The hoses should be allowed to hang freely but not allowed to become entangled.
trunnion.
4.11 Thorough planning should be done prior to cask immersion to ensure that immersion times are minimized.
.------                          5.1.7.3    Inspect the threads of the 9/16" bolts trunnion hole.
Normally, the shorter the immersion time, the less severe the contamination problems incurred and associated decontamination efforts. 4.12 Do not allow Cask to dry prior to decontamination.
holes.
4.13 Operation of the Fuel Building Bridge and Trolley Crane will be accomplished by qualified crane operators.
Tape over the bolt 5.1.7.4     Store the bolts and trunnion impact limiter in their prescribed storage area.
4.14 Safety belts will be worn by personnel as necessary to
NOTE:    If storage is made in a contaminated area the trunnion impact limiters should be covered with a sheet of plastic, etc. to avoid their contamination.
* prevent falling into Spent Fuel Pool. 4.15 All hand tools used over Spent Fuel Pool or Cask Area will have lines attached to prevent their dropping into the pool. 4.16 When fuel handling is in progress, all doors will be shut in the Spent Fuel Building, except for the movement of people or equipment.
Repeat steps 5.1.7.1 thru 5.1.7.4 for the remaining trunnion impact limiters. The front cradle dust cover plate must be swung back to gain access to front trunnion on underside of cask
4.17 Prior to moving Fuel Building Bridge Crane into the vicinity of the Cask Area, ensure cask crane has been moved clear so as not to obstruct the path of the bridge crane. of 76 1983
* OP-4.3 Page 13 of 76 NOV 4 1983
* 4.0 * !? ~:*-~;~~*~t~*;'
~      5.0  Procedure (continued) 5.1  Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.8    Position trailer under unloading crane and release front trunnion guide assembly and rear trunnion tie-down per the following instructions:  Make reference mark of position of trailer for loading/unloading operations, by taping a line on the side of the trailer midway+/-~ inch between cask front and rear trunnion center lines. Locate the trailer centered laterally on the road way+/-~ inch so that the cask trunnion mid point is over the crane centerline mark on the road+/- 1 inch *
a:!:.:.u ~uti,_.tJ ..... ?~~; OP-4.3 "'-'*-~*r..c Page 7 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Precautions and Limitations (continued) 4.18-Whenever the lifting beam or special service tools are being moved underwater, at least one person other than the man controlling or directing the crane movement, must be observing the lifting beam or service equipment.
* Required Equipment Ratchet 3/4 inch socket (for trunnion guide assembly bolts) 1 1/8 inch socket (for rear trunnion bolts) 1 1/8 inch open end wrench RIGHT LEFT                Front Trunnion 5.1.8.1    Remove the load binder handle restraint chain from the trailer chain securement hook.
The lifting beam or service equipment shall.not be moved when visibility problems obscure their underwater movement.
5.1.8.2    Release tension from the front trunnion restraint by lifting up on the binder handle
4.19 DELETE 4.20 Avoid excessive "jerky" motion of crane when carrying fuel. 4.21 When handling fuel, the fuel handling tool should be supported by hand, to prevent.unnecessary swinging action. 4.22 Move trolley and bridge smoothly when moving fuel. 4.23 Insure the locking device is in place prior to lifing fuel assembly.
* OP-4.3 Page 14 of 76 NOV 4 1983
4.24 Always ensure adequate clearance exists between the top of the Fuel Assembly Storage Racks and the bottom of the Fuel Assembly prior to moving fuel horizontally in pool, and when placing Fuel Assembly over the shipping cask. 4.25 Minimum allowable depth of water between top of Spent Fuel and surface of water is 8 feet while moving fuel. 4.26 Minimize axial loadipg during the last few inches of travel when setting an assembly down or attaching a handling tool by jogging the crane at minimum possible speed *
~    5.0  Procedure (continued) 5.1  Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)
* 4.0 *
RIGHT LEFT 5.1.8.3    Remove the binder attachment hook from beneath the trunnion tie-down support lip.
* OP-4.3 Page 8 o'f 76 NOV 4 1983 Precautions and Limitations (continued)
5.1.8.4    Swing the binder assembly free of the cask trunnion by pivoting around the tie-down rod pivot pin. Lay the binder assembly on trailer deck.
: 4. 27. *. -The Fuel Building Bridge Crane should be parked over the new Fuel Storage Area and the power supply disconnect switch shall be open and padlocked with an Administrative Control Lock whenever it is not in use. 4.28 Any fuel assembly movement will be proceeded by Form VNF-7 issued from the Refueling Office with the Superintendent of Operations approval signature affixed for fuel assembly position changes. 4.29 In the event of anything abnormal occurring during operations, stop and have situation evaluated by the Supervisor
5.1.8.5    Repeat steps 5.1.8.1 through 5.1.8.5 for the second front trunnion tie-down.
*
Trunnion Guide Assembly Removal 5.1.8.6    Swing back the front cradle dust cover plate from the underside of the trailer.
* OP-4.3 Page 9 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ,:,~r . ' ~'F~ U . . ? _., Procedure (continued)
5.1.8.7    Remove the two hex head bolts and their lock washers.
5.1.8.8     Remove the trunnion guide assembly from the trailer (this frees the lower redundant trunnion and allows cask removal from the trailer).
5.1.8.9    Remove the two bolts and their lock washer from the rear trunnion tie-down.
5.1.8.10    Lift the rear trunnion collar free of the cask rear trun~ion.
5.1.8.11    Repeat steps 5.1 .* 8.9 and 5.1.8.10 for the second rear trunnion tie-down.


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 f:~  ~~?~~~!!?'~ r,~r. ~~~,
                                                          ~; ~*' *' ,* ..... ...
V:,
Page 15 of 76 NOV 4  1983
~-
* 5.0  Procedure    (continued) 5.1   Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)
RIGHT LEFT 5.1.*9    Remove the shock absorbing covers per the instructions below and apply two layers of tape over each shock absorbing cover bolt and alignment pin hole on the front and rear front.                See figure land 2 in Attachment 2.
Required Equipment 2 legged sling equipped with connections to allow attachment to the lifting crane auxiliary hook (bale) and to the cover connecting shackles
*                            (loops, etc.)
2 connecting shackles Ratchet Ratchet drive extension 1 7/8 inch socket Storage area (for covers)
Plastic or tarpaulin cover (if necessary, see step
: 5. 1. 9. 7 Note) *
                              ~  ton chain fall with dynamometer 2 25 ft. ropes


Cask From Truck 5 .1.1 5 .1.2 Initial conditions are noted and satisfied.
OP-4.3 Page 16 of 76 NOV 4 1983
Precautions and Limitations as noted. 5.1.3.1 5.1.3.2 5.1.3.3 Release the tarpaulin in tie-down along the sides of the trailer by pulling the elastic tie-down ropes from the trailers tie-down hooks. Release the trailer rear tarpaulin section by unbuckling the leather straps along each side of the tarpaulin releasing the bottom bf the tarpaulin.
~      5.0  Procedure (continued) 5.1  Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)
Roll-up the rear tarpaulin section and secure it in this position by placing the straps around the tarpaulin and buckling the straps to the tarpaulin roof section
FRONT REAR 5.1.9.1     Center the crane auxiliary hook directly over the shock absorbing cover to be handled. There is no preference in the shock absorbing cover removal sequence; either may be removed first. Lower the crane auxiliary hook and attach to chain fall dynamometer assembly.
* 5.0 *
5.1.9.2    Attach the 2 legged sling lifting bale to to the dynamometer.
* t*"''f'J k i'..:.i~ OP-4.3 Page 10 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Pro*cedure (continued)
5.1.9.3     Attach the 2 legged sling to the 2 lifting lugs of the shock absorbing cover by means of the 2 connecting shackles.
5.1.9.4    Carefully raise the auxiliary hook to take slack out of the cable; then, by use of the chain hoist pick-up approximately 850 to 900 lbs as indicated on the dynamometer.
5.1.9.5    Remove the four shock absorbing cover bolts. The 2 top bolts should be removed before the 2 bottom bolts.
Inspect bolts for wear and grease with
* Never-Seeze prior to re-installation.


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 17 of 76 NOV 4  1983
~      5.0  Procedure (continued) 5.1  Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)
FRONT REAR NOTE:    Due to the angle of the covers from the vertical, care should be taken when removing these bolts as the bottom of the rear cover could swing out from the cask when its bolts are removed.
5.1.9.6    Gently move the shock absorbing cover away from the cask until the cover centering pins are clear of the cask.
Lift the shock_absorbing cover using crane auxiliary hook.
5.1.9.7    Move the shock absorbing cover to its designated storage area and disconnect the 2 shackles from the shock absorbing cover lifting lugs.
NOTE:    If the storage area is dirty or contaminated, the covers should be stored on a sheet of plastic or a tarpaulin and covered. Care should be exercised in I '
handling and storing cover bolts to prevent thread damage.
5.1.9.8    Transfer the crane hook and 2 legged sling to the other shock absorbing cover
* OP-4.3 Page 18 of 76
['?'~F~ i'.:'fl ~ ~*~ ~
* J -~1..: .                            NOV 4  1983
~
* 5.0  Procedure (continued) 5.1   Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)
FRONT REAR 5.1.9.9    Repeat steps 5.1.9.1 thru 5.1.9.7 for the other shock absorbing cover.
5.1.9.10    Remove the 2 legged sling assembly from crane auxiliary hook.
5 .1.10  Attach main hoist of cask crane to horizontal lifting beam using the following steps:
5.1.10.1    Traverse the crane over the stored horizontal lift beam.              Lower the hook between the yoke plated, insert the pin,
* and lock the pin in place with the keeper plate.              Apply Never-seeze grease to all four lifting pendant bearing surfaces.
5.1.10.2    Raise the horizontal lift beam clear of its supports and rotate it on the hook swivels to that the front end (short pendants) is oriented toward the front of the cask.              Raise high enough for the cask. Apply Never-seeze to cask trunnions.


Cask From Truck (continued)
OP-4.3 Page 19 of 76
NOTE: NOTE: 5.1.3.4 Slide the enclosure forward by having one man at ground level on each side of the trailer grasp the side section of the tarpaulin and pull it towards the front of the trailer (this will result in sliding the roller mechanism forward).
.ITIALS w:;r
Slide the enclosure until the tarpaulin is drawn as far as possible against the front of the enclosure.
                                                  ~...,,~~
A rope and pulley are also located on the inside of the trailer front wall to assist in pulling the tarpaulin forward. The mechanism can then be locked in place by the pin locks on the rails. If it is undesirable to limit the cask or cover lift height during removal from the trailer, the lengths of the slide mechanism roller tracks may be removed between the track support posts. This removal is done by retracting the spring loaded pins from the ends of the track and removing the track section. Steps in the: "Loading Procedure", marked by an asterisk(*), indicate information is required to be entered on the referenced form or report .
NOV 4  1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1  Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.11  Lower the beam slowly and guide the trunnion plates past the trunnions until they can be slipped on.
5.0
Raise the locking bars, slip the plates over the trunnions and release the locking bars so that they rest on the trunnions inside the trunnion lip thus preventing the plates from coming off, NOTE:    If difficulty is experience in attaching a rear trunnion plate because the cask is not centered on the trailer, it will be necessary to shift the cask to a central position first.
* OP-4.3 Page 11 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
5 .1.12  The cask should be raised carefully until it is clear above the supports.      The front will rise about 8 inches before the rear trunnions lift off their supports. If, at this time, it appears necessary to control lateral movement of the cask, ropes should be attached at the trunnions and held on the ground.
5.1.13  When the cask is clear of the trailer, the trailer should be driven out. The cask can then be lowered until it is near the elevation of the tilting frame trunnion supports. Rotate cask 90° to align cask with tilting frame. Apply Never-Seeze to tilting frame trunnion supports .


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 20 of 76
                                                  ~  "*"l ,.
                                                  ~* *, .** ' ;i                NOV 4 1983
                                                  ~;.. - _*:,
~
- 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1   Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5 .1.14  The rotated cask is then traversed over the tilting frame and lowered until the rear trunnions are in their supports. Care must be taken to center the rear trunnions within~ inch as they contact the supports. Once they are positioned the cask can be fully lowered.
5 .1.15  With the pendents slack, the locking bars can be raised and the trunnio~ plates removed from the trunnions. Raise the horizontal lift beam and traverse to the stora.ge supports.            Lower the horizontal lift beam onto the supports.            Disengage the hook pin, raise the hook, store the pin in the yoke plates.
5 .1.16  Attach lifting beam to crane hook using following steps:
5.1.16.1      Lower the crane hook between the strong back plates of the lift beam.          Align the
                                . four-inch hole in the crane hook with the four-inch hole in the lift beam.            (A sleeve adapter is to be required as the center hole of crane is larger than the 4 in. diameter pin).          See figure 3, Attachment 1 .


Cask From Truck (continued)  
OP-4.3 Page 21 of 76 rJ:'.'... *: :;;(
*5 .1.4 5.1.5 *5 .1. 6 5 .1. 7 Perform Cask and Trailer Radiation Surveys and Record Data on "Cask Receipt Radiation Survey". Complete the Survey Forms and retain for documentation requirements.
                                                              ~;;,.)j .: ... ...,* .._  NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1  Unloading Cask From Truck) (continued) -
This is performed and document by Station Health Physics Department.
5.1.16.2    Insert the four-inch diameter pin and install the keeper plate.
Health Physics requirements should be checked to determine if protective clothing (e.g. gloves) are required.
NOTE:        If manual engagement of lifting beam is desired, N/A step 5.1.17.
Remove Security Seals. (Seals on front and back shock absorbing covers). Remove seals. Remove (6) trunnion impact limiters per the following instructions: (two on lower end of cask, four on upper end of cask). See figure 2, Attachment
5.1.17  Connect air system to lifting beam and insure operability as follows:
: 1. Required Equipment Waterproof Tape Ratchet 13/16 inch socket Ratchet drive extension 50 ft. tape measure OP-4.3 Page 12 NOV 4 5.0 Procedure (continued)  
(Refer to figure 4).
5.1.17.1    Connect the air controller to an air supply of 75-100 PSIG.
5.1.17.2    Attach as many 50 ft. long sections of flexible hose !o the three quick-connectors on the air controller as needed. The hoses and quick connectors are color coded to assure proper connection.
5.1.17.3    Connect the three hoses to the fittings on the right hand side of the beam as one faces the side with the piping.
(hoses, piping and air controller are color coded).
5.1.17.4    Verify that the bypass toggle valves on the beams are in the closed position
* OP-4.3 Page 22 of 76 NOV 4 1983
~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1  Unloading  Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.17.5    Observe whether the lifting arms are in the released or engaged position. Set the arm control lever on the air controller to the same position.
5.1.17.6    Set the green handle of the locking cylinder valve to the "locked" position.
5.1.17.7    Depress the black handled toggle valve on the air controller until line pressure is indicated on the pressure gauge. Releasing the toggle will close this valve.
NOTE:    The system is now operational. It is always operated in the following sequence:
Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "unlocked".
Move the arm positioning lever to the desired position. Llfting beam latching mechanism fails to "engaged" 1:osition. Air may be disconnected once engaged for ease of movement of cask. Visually verify that the arms have moved fully to the desired position.
Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "locked" .


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 23 *of 76
                                                              -~ ... -~ ....
NOV 4  1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure, (continued) 5.1   Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)
CAUTION: Do not attempt to move the arms when the green handle is on "locked". However, if this should happen, return the arm positioning lever to the position corresponding with the current position of the arm of the beam before opening (unlocking) the locking cylinder.
When the system is in the "locked" position, visual confirmation is provided by small metal flags which are moved by the end of the locking pin.        These flags extend horizontally when the system is fully locked and can be seen from the surface of the pool when the cask is under water. The location of these flags may influence the position of the beam with respect to the cask (i.e., whether 180° rotation is desired) before the cask goes into the pool.
Note that the arm repositioning will take a few seconds more,if:
* The air lines are especially long
* Air pressure is on the low side
* The system is in redundant configuration.
Allow sufficient time before returning the green handled valves to the "locked" position .


Cask From Truck (continued)
OP-4.3
Trunnion #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 NOTE: .------NOTE:
                              *-,:-i'
* 5.1.7.1 Remove the limiter 9/16" bolt. As the bolt is removed, manually restrain the trunnion impact limiter (approximate weight of a trunnion impact limiter is 45 lbs). 5.1.7.2 i 5.1.7.3 5.1.7.4 When the bolt is removed, remove the trunnion impact limiter from the trunnion.
                                                  .... ~ ... ,....... ~ ....                                          Page 24 of 76
Inspect the threads of the 9/16" bolts trunnion hole. Tape over the bolt holes. Store the bolts and trunnion impact limiter in their prescribed storage area. If storage is made in a contaminated area the trunnion impact limiters should be covered with a sheet of plastic, etc. to avoid their contamination.
                                                                              ~*\~ r'?-,*--~
Repeat steps 5.1.7.1 thru 5.1.7.4 for the remaining trunnion impact limiters.
                                                                                            -~ ... - ~-....,             NOV 4  1983
The front cradle dust cover plate must be swung back to gain access to front trunnion on underside of cask
~
* of 76 1983 5.0
* 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1   Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5 .1.18  Apply Never-seeze grease to the lifting shoulder of front horizontal trunnions and to the engagement surface of the lifting arms.                                              Position the lift beam over the front trunnions and engage the lift beam to the trunnions.
* RIGHT LEFT
5.1.19  Tilt the cask to the vertical position using the crane.       Maintain crane and cables in a vertical position over lifting trunnions as the cask is tilted to the vertical position.                                                      Lift the cask off*
* OP-4.3 Page 13 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)  
the tilting frame.
5.1. 20  Transfer the cask to the decon. area (Decon Bldg.),
installing the bottom protective cover as the cask is lowered onto the pad per the following instructions:                      See figure 18.
5 .1. 20 .1           Prior to lowering the cask onto the decontamination pad, place the Bottom Protective Cover onto the decontamination pad.
5 .1. 20. 2          Lower the cask until its bottom region is approximately 6 inches above the bottom cover.
5.1.20.3            Manually lift the bottom cover and fit it onto the cask rear face (approximate weight 30 lb.).
* OP-4.3 Page 25 of 76 NOV 4
* 1983 ITIALS
: 5. 0 Procedure' ( con tisued) 5.1  Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5 .1. 20. 4    Attach the cover to the cask by looping the cover attachment cables over the lower cask trunnions and securing them to their attachment point on the bottom cover.
5.1.20.5        Slowly lower the cask onto the decontamination pad.
NOTE:          Start VDS warm-ur *.
(
5.1.21      Disengage the lift beam and move it to the fuel bldg. for attachment of the lid lifting sling .
5 .1. 22    Attach the lid lifting sling to the lift beam.
5 .1. 23    Proceed to section 5.2 for Preparation of Cask prior to unloading.
Date:


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 26 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2  Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel.
5.2.1    Initial condition are noted and satisfied.
5.2.2    Precautions and Limitations are noted.
Skirt Operation Precautions The skirt's condition should be checked on a routine basis. Special attention to leakage inspections is advised. If leaks are identified, the area shall be patched using a reinforced plastic patch kit.
5.2.3    Install the plastic protective skirt around the finned length of the cask per the instructions provided below:
* Skirt Installation Allen wrench - 3/8 inch Crescent wrench (adjustable)
Never-Seeze grease, or site approved equivalent Waterproof tape Ratchet wrench Torque wrench 0-100#
3/8" hex set screw socket 5.2.3.1     Place plastic protective cover on top surface of cask.


Cask From Truck (continued)  
OP-4.3 Page-:27 of 76 Nov 4  1983
                              \I!:.->;~~
ITIALS                              _;: I~ '.i 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2  Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.3.2              Remove the skirt from storage. Unroll it and inspect it to ensure that it is in an acceptable condition (i.e. no holes, acceptable contamination levels, etc.,) Check condition of skirt accessories, water hoses, connectors "Jl" and "J2" cables, cable tensioners, and screws. Grease screw threads if necessary.
NOTE:    Item numbers used in this section are shown in figures 20, 21, 22, 23, 24.
5.2.3.3              Insert the 2 pins (4) of the lower bar into the cask skirt lugs (11) and manually wrap the skirt around the cask utilizing the handles (5).
5.2.3.4              Insert the 2 pins (3) of the upper bar into the corresponding holes of the skirt lower bar (2). Install the 13 screws (22) to close the skirt.
5.2.3.5              Locate the upper skirt lateral guide (Ba) in the cask front drum groove.


====5.1.8 Position====
OP-4.3
trailer under unloading crane and release front trunnion guide assembly and rear trunnion tie-down per the following instructions:
                                            ~~*~7'1 Page 28.of 76
Make reference mark of position of trailer for loading/unloading operations, by taping a line on the side of the trailer midway+/-~ inch between cask front and rear trunnion center lines. Locate the trailer centered laterally on the road way+/-~ inch so that the cask trunnion mid point is over the crane centerline mark on the road+/- 1 inch
                                            ~*: :: :'..;    (r\,; ,., . -
* Required Equipment Ratchet 3/4 inch socket (for trunnion guide assembly bolts) 1 1/8 inch socket (for rear trunnion bolts) 1 1/8 inch open end wrench Front Trunnion 5.1.8.1 5.1.8.2 Remove the load binder handle restraint chain from the trailer chain securement hook. Release tension from the front trunnion restraint by lifting up on the binder handle * 
                                                            . ;.: .._.. 1 :'..:;,
                                            *(:_-:'t.L ..ili                                      NOV 4  1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2  Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.3.6    Position the cable as shown in Fig. 20 detail 1. The cable is wrapped "below" the lateral guide (i.e. between the lateral guide and the cask center).
Wrap the cable once around the cask as shown in Fig. 20.
5.2.3.7    Insert the cable under the upper bar (1) and into the drum groove (insert cable in groove shown in Fig. 20, detail 1 and wrap the cable around the cask a second time, while carefully positioning the cable in the cask drum groove, "below" the lateral guide (as shown in Fig. 20, detail 1).
5.2.3.8     Pull the cable taut and check that the cable is correctly positioned in the drum groove.
5.2.3.9    Insert the free end of the cable through the rotation drum hole (15) of the rotation drum (14) of the upper skirt cable tensioner (7).                              (Refer to Fig. 20 and Fig. 23) .


===5.0 RIGHT===
OP-4.3 Page 29 of 76
LEFT *-------------------
                                            .... -.. ,:  .  *. --~
OP-4.3 Page 14 NOV 4 Procedure (continued)  
NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2  Preparation of Cask for Lo-ading Spent- Fuel ( continued) 5.2.3.10    Lock the cable by tightening the cable locking screw (16).                    (Fig. 23) 5.2.3.11    Attach the locking 0-rings (18) to the locking handles (17) as shown in Figure 23 (the 0-ring forces the locking handles down onto the rotational drums (14) and prevents rotation.                    This keeps the cables under tension).
5.2.3.12    Attach wrenches to the cable tensioning nuts (19) and turn the rotation drums as
* indicated by arrows in section AA of Fig. 24.
time.
Turn both drums at the same The locking handle should be pulled up to allow the rotation drum to turn.                When the cable is sufficiently tensioned, push the locking handle (17) firmly down to ensure that it is seated against the rotation drum (14).
(Fig. 23)
: 5. 2. 3 ..13 Locate the lower lateral guide (8b) in the cask rear drum groove.                    (Fig. 20)


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 30 of 76 NOV 4  1983
~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2  Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.3.14    Repeat steps 5.2.3.5 through 5.2.3.12 for the lower skirt cable tensioner (6)
(the cables placed between the lateral guide and the center of the cask).
5.2.3.15    Install a layer of water proof tape along the upper and lower edges of the skirt as shown on Fig. 20, detail 1.
Tape also to be installed over the upper bar after the screws have been installed. This reduces skirt water supply requirements by improving the skirt sealing.
5.2.4    Remove the .blind flanges from openings "Jl" and "JZ" and install the connectors "Jl and "J2" and torque the bolts to 35 ft-lb per the following instructions:
5.2.4.1     One torque wrench equipped with a 3/8 hex set screw socket suitable for setting torques or 35 ft-lbs is required.
5.2.4.2      Install the three bolts for each flange and torque the bolts to 35 ft-lbs in counter :lockwise direction.


Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.8.3 5.1.8.4 5.1.8.5 Remove the binder attachment hook from beneath the trunnion tie-down support lip. Swing the binder assembly free of the cask trunnion by pivoting around the tie-down rod pivot pin. Lay the binder assembly on trailer deck. Repeat steps 5.1.8.1 through 5.1.8.5 for the second front trunnion tie-down.
OP-4.3 Page 31 of 76
Trunnion Guide Assembly Removal 5.1.8.6 5.1.8.7 5.1.8.8 5.1.8.9 5.1.8.10 5.1.8.11 -Swing back the front cradle dust cover plate from the underside of the trailer. Remove the two hex head bolts and their lock washers. Remove the trunnion guide assembly from the trailer (this frees the lower redundant trunnion and allows cask removal from the trailer).
                                              -.. - ~"'-'                    NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued)
Remove the two bolts and their lock washer from the rear trunnion tie-down.
Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.4.3      Repeat the torquing of the bolts to 35 ft-lb in a counter clockwise direction.
Lift the rear trunnion collar free of the cask rear trun~ion.
5.2.5   Remove the blind flange from opening  "B" using the 3/8 inch hex set screw socket.
Repeat steps 5.1 .* 8.9 and 5.1.8.10 for the second rear trunnion tie-down.
5.2.6   Perform radiation survey of the exposed recess of opening  "B" (y at contact) 5.2.7    Seal the cask front face shock absorbing cover bolt and alignment pin holes by applying two layers over each hole.
of 76 1983 
5.2.8   Remove grease from all trunnions except for areas that come in contact with the lifting arms during handling between the decontamination pad and the pool.
~-* 5.0 RIGHT LEFT *
5.2.9   Equalize the cask cavity atmosphere as follows:
* f:~
5.2.9.1     Install the VDS in the Sampling Mode as shown on Figure 7. Ensure valves V-1, V-2 and V-3 ar closed and Connection "B" is blanked off at the 2 inch vacuum hose connection prior to connecting to the cask, (and sample cylinder is attached, optional).
r,~r.
NOTE:        Cask sampling will be optional as desired by the fuel handling supervisor
V ~; ~*' *' ,* * ..... : ... :, OP-4.3 Page 15 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
* OP-4.3 Page 32 of 76 NOV 4 1983
~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2  Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.9.2    Measure t.he cask internal cavity pressure by opening valve V-2 and reading the pressure off gauge G-1.
Close valve V-2.
5.2.9.3    Dependent upon the measured cask internal cavity pressure, perform the following:
If the measured pressure is less than atmospheric, vent the cask cavity to atmosphere by disconnecting 2" blank from the "B" connector. See Figure 7 and 14.
NOTE:      Insure the Decon bldg. exhaust vent is in service and is in the filter mode.
If the measured pressure is greater than atmospheric, release cask pressure by opening valve V-3 thereby venting the cask cavity to gaseous radwaste.
Discharge line is connected to valve V-3 prior to opening valve V-3. When cask is at atmospheric pressure, close valve V-3.


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 .
Page 33 of 76
:--,:.. .,..,...~ - n::...,.:~7 V."l:i.-
ITIALS L. **              :;~°k~:~[~                                    NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2  Preparation of Cask for                  Loading Spent Fuel (continued)
NOTE:    N/A steps 5.2.9.4 thru 5.2.12 if fuel handling supervisor desires sampling to be deleted.
NOTE:    VDS pump must be started for this evolution.
5.2.9.4    Purge the gaseous sample cylinder, "B" connector and associated piping as follows:
5.2.9.5    Remove the                            "B" Connector with sample cylinder from cask.
5.2.9.6    Open valves V-1, V-2 and V-3.
.-                        5.2.9.7    Start vacuum pump and run for three minutes to evacuate sample cylinder, Connector and associated piping.
                                                                                                        "B" 5.2.9.8      Close valves V-1, V-2, V-3 and stop vacuum pump.
5.2.9.9    Reconnect                          "B" Connector with sample cylinder to cask Hansen Coupling at                              "B" flange opening.
5.2.9.10    Open valves V-1 and V-2 to draw sample from cask cavity into sample cylinder.
5.2.9.11    After collecting the sample, isolate the sample cylinder by closing valves V-1 and V-2; then remove "B" Connector from cask.


Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.*9 Remove the shock absorbing covers per the instructions below and apply two layers of tape over each shock absorbing cover bolt and alignment pin hole on the front and rear front. See figure land 2 in Attachment
OP-4.3 Page 34 of 76 NOV 4 1983
: 2. Required Equipment 2 legged sling equipped with connections to allow attachment to the lifting crane auxiliary hook (bale) and to the cover connecting shackles (loops, etc.) 2 connecting shackles Ratchet Ratchet drive extension 1 7/8 inch socket Storage area (for covers) Plastic or tarpaulin cover (if necessary, see step 5. 1. 9. 7 Note)
~ 5.0 Procedure (continued)
* ton chain fall with dynamometer 2 25 ft. ropes 
I 5.2  Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.9.12    Remove the sample flask and analyze cask gaseous.activity for fission gas content.
5.2.10  Initiate Cask Filling as follows:
Refer to Figures 2, 8, 12, 15 and 13 5.2.10.1  .Remove the blind flange form opening "C" and survey the recess.
5.2.10.2   Remove the shield plug from opening "A".
NOTE:    When removing or working i? the area of shield plug "A", care should be exercised as radiation streaming may be present.
5.2.10.3    Install the CDS in the Cask Filling/Cooling Mode as shown in Figure
: 8. Install Connectors "A2", install the three bolts and torque to 35 ft-lb as per steps 5.2.4.1 thru 5.2.4.3 (Fig 13).
Ensure valve line-up is as shown with valves V-9 and V-10, V-11, V-12 closed .


===5.0 FRONT===
OP-4.3 Page 35 of 76
REAR
                                          '.*-:-.... -, .. '.. ~~
* OP-4.3 Page 16 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)  
                                                                              *,,*, . "  NOV 4 1983
                                                                  ,. ,.:.:: :J/,IL f
~ 5.0  Procedure (continued) 5.2  Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.10.4    Open valve V-9, and V-11.
5.2.10.5    DELETE 5.2.10.6    Initiate filling water ~low through the CDS by opening valve V-10.
Establish a cask cavity filling water inlet flow rate by throttling valve V-10.        Continue to fill the cask cavity
      *' ..                        through connector "C".
5.2.10.7    DELETE 5.2.10.8    When no entrained air is visible in vent hose flow, stop the flow of fill water.
Close valve V-10, open V-12.
5.2.10.9    Remove Connector "A2" and Connectors "C" and drain the CDS lines.
5.2.10.10  *Install shield plug "A" without bolts.
NOTE:    Since the shield plug "A" is not torqued, the cask cavity is vented providing thermal expansion protection.


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 36 of 76 NOV 4  1983
                                            .., ' . . . :_*.:; ...... ,:~
:\3
~
                                                                          * ; *1r; 5.0 P~ocedure (continued) 5.2  Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.10.11  Attach a drain line to Connector "C" and reinstall Connector "C" to the cask to adjust the cask water level until it is approximately twelve (12) inches below the top of the cask lid.                  (i.e. drain 2 gallons).
5.2.10.12  Disconnect Connector "C" from the cask (Hansen coupling at "C" is self-sealing).
5.2.10.13  Visually inpsect the gaskets of the QC                              blind flanges for "B" and "C" to ensure they are free of cuts, grooves, gouges or cracks.      Particular attention should be given to observe "feathering" at teh edges. An indication of normal conditions will be that the seating surface appears as a somewhat flattened area. If the inpsection indicates a gasket defect, the gasket should be replaced
* OP-4.3 Page 37 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2  Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.10.14    Reinstall. the flanges of openings "B" and "C" per the procedure in Steps 5.2.4.1 - 5.2.4.3 and tape flanges.
5.2.11  Remove the port plug from opening  "D". See Figure 2.
5.2.12  Loosen and remove lid bolts per the following procedure:  See Figure 25.
5.2.12.1    Select one bolt and loosen 1/4 turn.
5.2.12.2    Continue loosening all remaining bolts by 1/4 turn following the sequence as numbered on Figure 25.
* 5.2.12.3    Repeat the loosening of the lid bolts by another 1/4 turn by repeating the procedure in steps 5.2.12.1 and 5.2.12.2.
5.2.12.4    Upon completion of both 1/4 turn cycles, all the bolts may then be removed.
5.2.12.5    Inspect removed bolts for damage, store and protect bolts from contamination in bolt storage box.
5.2.13  Remove plastic protective cover from top surface of cask.
5.2.14  Proceed to Section 5.3 for loading of cask.
* Completed By:
Date:


Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.9.1 5.1.9.2 5.1.9.3 5.1.9.4 5.1.9.5 Center the crane auxiliary hook directly over the shock absorbing cover to be handled. There is no preference in the shock absorbing cover removal sequence; either may be removed first. Lower the crane auxiliary hook and attach to chain fall dynamometer assembly.
OP-4.3 Page 38 of 76 NOV 4  1983 ITIALS                                .-  :--
Attach the 2 legged sling lifting bale to to the dynamometer.
5.0 Ptoced1Ire (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading 5.3.1     Apply never-seeze grease to lifting trunnions on areas that come in contact with lifting arms during cask handling between the decontamination pad and the spent fuel cask area of the pool.
Attach the 2 legged sling to the 2 lifting lugs of the shock absorbing cover by means of the 2 connecting shackles.
5.3.2    Position lifting beam (still attached to cask crane main hook) over the cask.
Carefully raise the auxiliary hook to take slack out of the cable; then, by use of the chain hoist pick-up approximately 850 to 900 lbs as indicated on the dynamometer.
5.3.3    Connect air system to lifting beam and insure operability as follows:
Remove the four shock absorbing cover bolts. The 2 top bolts should be removed before the 2 bottom bolts. Inspect bolts for wear and grease with Never-Seeze prior to re-installation. 
(Refer to figure 4).
5.3.3.1       Connect the air controller to an air supply of 75-100 PSIG.
5.3.3.2      Attach as many 50 ft. long sections of flexible hose to the three quick-connectors on the air controller as needed. The hoses and quick connectors are color coded to assure proper connection.
5.3.3.3
* Connect the three hoses to the fittings on the right hand side of the beam as one faces the side with the piping.
(hoses, piping and air controller are color coded).
5.3.3.4      Verify that the bypass toggle valves on the beams are in the closed position.


===5.0 FRONT===
OP-4.3 Page 39 of 76
REAR
                                                    ;.;*~~~
* OP-4.3 Page 17 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)  
tj.~ ; . ';,*                  NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.3.5  Observe whether the lifting arms are in the released or engaged position. Set the arm control lever on the air controller to the same position.
5.3.3.6  Set the green handle of the locking cylinder valve to the "locked" position.
5.3.3.7  Depress the black handled toggle valve on the air controller until line pressure is indicated on the pressure gauge. Releasing the toggle will close this valve.
NOTE:    The system is now operational.        It is always operated
* in the following sequence:
Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "unlocked".
Move the arm positioning lever to the desired position. Lifting beam latching mechanism fails to "engaged" position. Air may be disconnected once engaged for ease of movement of cask.        Visually verify that the arms have moved fully to the desired position.
Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "locked" .


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 40 of 76 NOV 4 1983 TIALS 5.0 Pr.ocedure (continued)                          '"' .. <,*' ~*
                                                                            -. *' j; ._. .-~ ... I.
5.3    Cask Loading (continued)
CAUTION:    Do not attempt to move the arms when the green handle is on "locked".                            However, if this should happen, return the arm positioning lever to the position corresponding with the current position of the arm of the beam before opening (unlocking) the locking cylinder.
When the system is in the "locked" position, visual confirmation is provided by small metal flags which are moved by the end of the locking pin.
These flags extend horizontally when the system is fully locked and can be seen from the surface of the pool when the cask is under water.        The location of these flags may influence the position of the beam with respect to the cask (i.e., whether 180&deg; rotation is desired) before the cask goes into the pool
* OP-4.3 Page 41 .of 76
                                      .-.~. -.                                      NOV 4  1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued)
Note that the arm repositioning will take a few seconds more if:
The air lines are especially long Air pressure is on the low side The system is in redundant configuration Allow sufficient time before returning the green handled valves to the "locked" position. -
5.3.4    Lower the lifting beam into position with th_e guide arms resting on the          top surface of cask trunnions.
5.3.5    Attach the lid lifting sling to the cask lid.          Make trial lid lifts, adjusting the lifting sling as necessary so that the lid raises in a level attitude and no binding relative to the cask occurs.
5.3.6    Engage the lifting beam to cask trunnions as described in note in Step 5.3.3.          Install four lid bolts hand tight.
5.3.7    Lift the cask off the decontamination pad and transfer to the Fuel Building .


Cask From Truck (continued)
:-..,_                        OP-4.3 Page 42 of 76 Llj    tJ~&#xa3;J~*,~&#xa3;              NOV 4  1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.8    Rotate the cask to orient the skirt fill and vent connections ("Jl" and "J2") in order to facilitate connection and disconnection when cask is in the water.  (See Figure 26).
NOTE: NOTE: Due to the angle of the covers from the vertical, care should be taken when removing these bolts as the bottom of the rear cover could swing out from the cask when its bolts are removed. 5.1.9.6 5.1.9.7 Gently move the shock absorbing cover away from the cask until the cover centering pins are clear of the cask. Lift the shock_absorbing cover using crane auxiliary hook. Move the shock absorbing cover to its designated storage area and disconnect the 2 shackles from the shock absorbing cover lifting lugs. If the storage area is dirty or contaminated, the covers should be stored on a sheet of plastic or a tarpaulin and covered. Care should be exercised in I ' handling and storing cover bolts to prevent thread damage. 5.1.9.8 Transfer the crane hook and 2 legged sling to the other shock absorbing cover *
5.3.9   Attach the fill hose to "Jl" when cask is in position over the spent fuel pit cask area.
* 5.0 FRONT REAR
5.3.10  Lower the cask into the cask area while filling the skirt volume with cond. water such that the skirt internal volume water level is maintained approximately 6 11 to 12" above the cask area water surface.
* OP-4.3 ['?'~F~ i'.:'fl
NOTE:    When cask is in position establish reference mark on floor (use plumb bob suspended from cab of crane) for future alignment of crane.
* J -~1..: . Page 18 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)  
5.3.11  Reduce crane speed and water flow rate into the skirt as the skirt water level approaches the top of the skirt. When the entire skirt volume is full (indicated.by water issuing from the "J2" port),
connect floating vent to connector "J2", and tie off float at floor level allowing _overflow to return to the s.F.P
* OP-4.3 Page 43 *of 76
                                        **--* -. ,                    NOV 4  1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.12  Disconnect water fill line from cond. hose and connect to water level box.
CAUTION: Ensure water fill line is held approximately one half(~) foot above vent at all time during this step. Make up to water level box with cond. hose.
5.3.13  Maintain an approximate one-half(~) foot water head over-pressure inside the skirt by maintaining the water level in the water level box approximately one half(~) foot above the vent.
NOTE:   This prevents inleakage of contaminated water, and must be maintained at all times while cask is submerged.
5.3.13.*1    Remove the four remaining lid bolts and place them in the bolt box.
5.3.14  Continue lowering the cask to the cask pad at normal crane speed while continuing to maintain the one-half(~) foot of water over-pressure in the skirt.
5.3.15  Gently place the cask on the pad.
(Figure 26).
NOTE:    Utilize underwater camera as an aid to determine distance when cask is approaching bottom.


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 44 of 76 NOV 4  1983
~ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.16  Release the lifting beam from the cask.
(Refer to Section 5.3.3 - Air Locking System Instructions).
5.3.17  Remove the cask lid as follows:
5.3.17.1   Slowly raise the crane hook in "jog" speed until the cable is slightly taut.
Note the height of the crane hook cables.  (This is done by noting a reference point on the crane cables, etc.).
5.3.17.2    Slowly raise the cask lid in the jog speed until the lid lifts freely out of the lid recess area. Reference mark the crane position.
NOTE:    If the lid shows signs of binding, lower the crane hook until the cable is slack and carefully check the crane hook vertical .. alignment over the lid center and _adjust as necessary. Repeat steps 5.3.17.1 and 5.3.17.2 as needed.
5.3.18  Once lid is free, continue lifting the lid in normal speed.
5.3.19  Raise the lifting beam from the cask area.
5.3.20  Wash down the main hook, cables and lift beam with P.G. water as they exit the pool.


Cask From Truck (continued) 5 .1.10 5.1.9.9 5.1.9.10 Repeat steps 5.1.9.1 thru 5.1.9.7 for the other shock absorbing cover. Remove the 2 legged sling assembly from crane auxiliary hook. Attach main hoist of cask crane to horizontal lifting beam using the following steps: 5.1.10.1 5.1.10.2 Traverse the crane over the stored horizontal lift beam. Lower the hook between the yoke plated, insert the pin, and lock the pin in place with the keeper plate. Apply Never-seeze grease to all four lifting pendant bearing surfaces.
OP-4.3 Page 45 of 76 NOV 4 . 1983 ITIALS
Raise the horizontal lift beam clear of its supports and rotate it on the hook swivels to that the front end (short pendants) is oriented toward the front of the cask. Raise high enough for the cask. Apply Never-seeze to cask trunnions.
                                                                    ... *, . . 1;:.: ~*
.ITIALS 5.0
5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.21  Install the Front Face Protective Cover per the instructions below and as shown on Fig. 19.                 Fuel pit bridge may be used as a working platform.
* OP-4.3 Page 19 of 76 NOV 4 1983 w:;r ~...,,~~ Procedure (continued)
5.3.21.l    Attach a tag line to each cover handling cable.
CAUTION: Prior to bridge travel, ensure there are not obstructions.
5.3.21.2   Orient the cover over the lid recess area such that the 2 lid centering pins are in alignment with the b*osses of the cover.
5.3.21.3    Lower the cover onto the cask until it is fully down (i.e. slack cable).                The cover is designed such that the edges of the cover will center it correctly.
NOTE:    If the cover position is not correct, slowly lift the cover clear, adjust its position as needed by rotating t~e crane hook and repeat Steps 5.3.21.2 and 5.3.21.3. Utilize underwater camera as necessary .


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 46 of 76 NOV 4  7983
~
                                                        ~~2~ rr~  r ,,
                                                        ... *'  1 ;_:'
5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.21.4    Using the tag lines, position the cables such that they hang along the side of the cask and are out of the way of fuel unloading operations.        Tie off ends of tag lines at operating level.
          *5.3.22  Per the instructions below, load the fuel assemblies into the cask cavity. Fuel Resources will verify each fuel assembly I.D. number, ANSI number and cask location.        Record the position of each fuel assembly and insert component (if applicable) in the "Cask Loading Report".      Refer to VNF-7 for fuel locations and see Figure 28 for fuel orientation in the cask."
NOTES:  1. Any lateral position adjustments of the fuel handling tool must be done with the fuel assembly outside the cask fuel compartments during loading operations or with the fuel assembly disengaged from the fuel handling tool during.unloading operations (unless otherwise specified in these instructions).
: 2. It is recommended that reference height indications be marked on the fuel handling equipment such that they can be referred to, to assist in determining fuel assembly heights .


Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.11 NOTE: 5 .1.12 5.1.13 Lower the beam slowly and guide the trunnion plates past the trunnions until they can be slipped on. Raise the locking bars, slip the plates over the trunnions and release the locking bars so that they rest on the trunnions inside the trunnion lip thus preventing the plates from coming off, If difficulty is experience in attaching a rear trunnion plate because the cask is not centered on the trailer, it will be necessary to shift the cask to a central position first. The cask should be raised carefully until it is clear above the supports.
OP-4.3 Page 47 of 76 NOV 4 1983
The front will rise about 8 inches before the rear trunnions lift off their supports.
~ 5.0 Procedure (continued)                            * ~ ::
If, at this time, it appears necessary to control lateral movement of the cask, ropes should be attached at the trunnions and held on the ground. When the cask is clear of the trailer, the trailer should be driven out. The cask can then be lowered until it is near the elevation of the tilting frame trunnion supports.
:~il"~.~j 5.3  Cask Loading (continued)
Rotate cask 90&deg; to align cask with tilting frame. Apply Never-Seeze to tilting frame trunnion supports . 
NOTES:  (continued)
-5.0
: 3. During all fuel transfer operations performed in the pool, ensure that the fuel assemblies are free of all obstacles throughout transfer.
* OP-4.3 Page 20 of 76 NOV 4 1983 "*"l ,. ~* *, .** ' ;i ~;.. -_*:, Procedure (continued)  
: 4. Fuel Resources personnel will be notified prior to any fuel movements.
 
Fuel Assembly Loading 5.3.22.1    Attach the fuel handling tool and load scale to the bridge crane hook, adding a safety sling between the hook and the tool.
===5.1 Unloading===
5.3.22.2    Transfer the fuel handling tool to a point directly over the fuel assembly to be loaded into the cask.     Refer to VNF-7.
 
5.3.22.3    Verify that the fuel handling tool is centered over the desired fuel assembly.
Cask From Truck (continued) 5 .1.14 5 .1.15 5 .1.16 The rotated cask is then traversed over the tilting frame and lowered until the rear trunnions are in their supports.
If it is not, adjust its position as needed. Ensure that the fuel handling tool is free of any obstacles during these adjustments.
Care must be taken to center the rear trunnions within~ inch as they contact the supports.
Once they are positioned the cask can be fully lowered. With the pendents slack, the locking bars can be raised and the trunnio~ plates removed from the trunnions.
Raise the horizontal lift beam and traverse to the stora.ge supports.
Lower the horizontal lift beam onto the supports.
Disengage the hook pin, raise the hook, store the pin in the yoke plates. Attach lifting beam to crane hook using following steps: 5.1.16.1 Lower the crane hook between the strong back plates of the lift beam. Align the . four-inch hole in the crane hook with the four-inch hole in the lift beam. (A sleeve adapter is to be required as the center hole of crane is larger than the 4 in. diameter pin). See figure 3, Attachment 1 .
ITIALS 5.0
* rJ:'.' ... *: :;;( ~;;,.)j .: ... ...,* .. _ OP-4.3 Page 21 NOV 4 Procedure (continued)


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 48 of 76
~
                                                                                    .NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.22.4          When alignment is satisfactory, slowly begin lowering the fuel handling tool onto the fuel assembly.
5.3.22.5          Continue lowering the fuel handling tool until it is completely down on the fuel assembly (i.e. no weight on load cell).
5.3.22.6          Engage the fuel assembly with the fuel
                                ** *
* handling tool and .lock handle.
f'                .
5.3.22.7          Slowly raise the fuel assembly while closely monitoring the load scale for excessive load changes.
5.3.22.8          Continue slowly lifting the fuel assembly until its bottom nozzle is above the storage racks.
5.3.22.9          Transfer the fuel assembly to its spent fuel cask location.        Refer .to VNF-7, and Figure 28.
: 5. 3. 22 .10 . Slowly lower the fuel assembly into the designated spent fuel cask location while closely monitoring the load scale for excessive load changes.        After the fuel assembly seats on the bottom of the cask, disengage the fuel handling tool
* from the fuel assembly."


Cask From Truck) (continued)  
OP-4.3 Page 49 of 76 NOV 4      1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued)                                  -*~~-
-5.1.17 5.1.16.2 NOTE: Insert the four-inch diameter pin and install the keeper plate. If manual engagement of lifting beam is desired, N/A step 5.1.17. Connect air system to lifting beam and insure operability as follows: (Refer to figure 4). 5.1.17.1 5.1.17.2 5.1.17.3 5.1.17.4 Connect the air controller to an air supply of 75-100 PSIG. Attach as many 50 ft. long sections of flexible hose !o the three quick-connectors on the air controller as needed. The hoses and quick connectors are color coded to assure proper connection.
5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5 .3 .22.11  Repeat Steps 5.3.22.2 thru 5.3.22.10 until the cask is load.
Connect the three hoses to the fittings on the right hand side of the beam as one faces the side with the piping. (hoses, piping and air controller are color coded). Verify that the bypass toggle valves on the beams are in the closed position
5.3.22.12    Store the fuel handling tool in its storage area and disconnect it" from the crane hook.
* of 76 1983 5.0
5.3.23          Remove the front face protective cover from the cask:
* OP-4.3 Page 22 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
5.3.23.1     Slowly remove the cover from the front face by lifting the tag lines.             Verify that cover is removed without binding, etc.
5.3.23.2      Transfer the cover to its storage area and store properly.
5.3.24          Replace the cask lid on the cask per the following instructions:
* 5.3.24.1      Transfer th_e lid to the position directly over the cask cavity lid
_ seating surface using cask area crane by positioning crane at reference mark established in Step 5.3.17.2.


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 50 of 76 NOV 4 . 1983
  .ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.24.2    Establish correct cask cavity lid orientation (orientation markers) and lower it to a height of about 4 feet above the cask. Check lid alignment and orientation as needed.
NOTE:    This a~ignment is important and should be done carefully. Angular orientation is to be established by lining up the cask and lid orientation marks prior to installing the lid. The lid should be rotated as needed.
5.3.24.3    Slowly lower the lid into the lid recess.
NOTE:    Lateral and rotational adjustments of the lid may be made as the lid nears the cask front face but no lateral movement of the crane should be made once the lid has entered the lid recess. If further lid position adjustments are needed, the lid should be lifted unt~l it is free of the lid recess and above the cask.
5.3.24.4    If the lid indicates significant binding during crane descent, slowly raise the lid in the jog made until it is again free of binding and raise the lid out of
* the lid recess. Check the lid alignment and repeat Steps 5.3.24.2 and 5.3.24.3.


Cask From Truck (continued)
I -  .,
NOTE: 5.1.17.5 5.1.17.6 5.1.17.7 Observe whether the lifting arms are in the released or engaged position.
t:"" 1'C='l")up=
Set the arm control lever on the air controller to the same position.
                                                                                                                                                                                        ,_ OP-4 3
Set the green handle of the locking cylinder valve to the "locked" position.
                                                                                                                                                                                                          \.-i VIRGi/JIA EL'ECTR1 C .t-.1\'V PO[{=R COMPANY                                                                                                                              ' ""' '- v NUMBER:
Depress the black handled toggle valve on the air controller until line pressure is indicated on the pressure gauge. Releasing the toggle will close this valve. The system is now operational.
* SURR,' PC)(t1~R STA TIO/\
It is always operated in the following sequence:
( 2)
Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "unlocked".
PROCEf'URE                                                                                                                                        DATE:          ~NOV 4    1983
Move the arm positioning lever to the desired position.
              *-.        -*-                                                                                                                            (3)                                              ( !; )
Llfting beam latching mechanism fails to "engaged" 1:osition.
T~'P~ PROCEDURE:             OPERATIONS PROCEDURE                                                                                                                        UNTT #:        1 & 2 (5)
Air may be disconnected once engaged for ease of movement of cask. Visually verify that the arms have moved fully to the desired position.
TTTL'E:      IRRADIATED FUEL HANDLING                                            &    SHIPMENT
Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "locked" .
( 6)
ITIALS 5.0 * -~ ... -~ .... OP-4.3 Page 23 NOV 4 Procedure, (continued)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE REV1S10NS:
SECTIOI--'                                                        DATE 1.0                                                . tt~'
                                                                                                                              .J. 4          19S3
                                                                                                          *:*:~;!~:*  C 2.0                                        .":./ .-NOV 4                  1983
                                                                            . ,;              :-  ~
3
* 0. :*) ,.             .. '~            :1 *.\, :NOV.:  ....
4 1983
                                                      -< 4
* o:_;: ~;,;i::T>r<                              :*. : ,. NOV 4 1983
                                                                      *. *._ ~-    -*._                  ;..,,-**
                                    -* .._-:_.-.      ~. 3 . o-_*.:,*-* . ;          **"::::* _::
                                                                                        ~~; .
                                                                                        ~;.-
NOV 4              1983
                              ;*.*:~
                                                  ; ./-'.ATTACHMENT
                                                  .'j.**
ATTACHMENT II ATTACHMENT :~~!
I                  NOV 4 NOV 4
* NOV 4 ._:* t983_.)
1~3:.
                                                                                                                                          ~.";,:.
                                                                                                                                      .-.~~.. . :**_;." ::-
:: -~---:
ATTACHMENT                          I.;'.
1983
( 7)
DATE:            II Q.UAL7T\' COI-JITOL                                                                                                                                    ( ';f~ J\                                      ( :.: )
                                                                                      ../ I  .. ! _\_~, .. '\._.I_/
o                                              VATE:
                                                                                                                            /
* APPROVED STAT1 O,~                                                  A,"l            OPER.l.T1 NG COMlJ.TTTEE: , --
I : * )                                          (:...:.)
                                                                            ,.,.~
                                                                                ,                                                                                    DATE:            NOV 4   198]


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 51 of 76 NOV ,4 1983
~        5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.24.5   As the lid nears its full down position, ensure that the 2 centering pins are protruding through their respective lid flange holes.
NOTE:    Use binoculars and/or underwater camera as needed to perform this evolution.
5.3.24.6    If they do not protrude stop crane descent. Slowly raise the lid a few inches.
5.3.24.7    Twist the crane hook in whichever
* direction is needed by referencing the lid orientation marks. Return to Step 5.3.24.3 and continue lid installation.
5.3.24.8    Continue lowering until the lid is fully
_ _ _ _QC                              down as indicated by slack cable in the sling cables. Visually verify the lid for proper installation.  (i.e. visual looks to be seated and the alignment pins protrude from the lid plate).


Cask From Truck (continued)
OP-4.3 Page 52 of 76 NOV 4 1983
CAUTION: Do not attempt to move the arms when the green handle is on "locked".
~  5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.25  Lower the lifting beam slowly until its guide arms are resting on shoulders of lifting trunnions.
However, if this should happen, return the arm positioning lever to the position corresponding with the current position of the arm of the beam before opening (unlocking) the locking cylinder.
5.3.26  Engage the primary lift beam to the cask lifting trunnions as outlined in Step 5.3.3.
When the system is in the "locked" position, visual confirmation is provided by small metal flags which are moved by the end of the locking pin. These flags extend horizontally when the system is fully locked and can be seen from the surface of the pool when the cask is under water. The location of these flags may influence the position of the beam with respect to the cask (i.e., whether 180&deg; rotation is desired) before the cask goes into the pool. Note that the arm repositioning will take a few seconds more,if:
5.3.27  Raise the cask from the bottom of the cask area.
* The air lines are especially long
5.3.28  Continue raising cask until top face is approximately even with operating deck.
* Air pressure is on the low side
5.3.29  Check and grease (using Never-Seeze) the threads of all removed cask bolts and screws as needed.
* The system is in redundant configuration.
.-           5.3.30  Remove water from four bolt holes (with an aspirator) prior to returning four lid bolts which were removed in Step 5.3.13.1.
Allow sufficient time before returning the green handled valves to the "locked" position . *of 76 1983
NOTE:    Each bolt is associated with a specific bolt hole.
* 5.0 OP-4.3 *-,:-i' Page 24 of 76 NOV 4 1983 -.. , :,;--.... ... , ....... .... ~*\~ r'?-,*--~
Check bolt number with hole number.
-~ ... -~-...., Procedure (continued)
5.3.31  Replace the above mentioned lid bolts in their respective hole and hand tighten.
5.3.32  Remove four legged sling from lid lifting lugs by removing fo~r shackles.
5.3.33  Continue raising cask form the SFP.


===5.1 Unloading===
OP-4.3 Page 53 of 76 NOV 4 1983
~ 5.0 Ptoeedure (continued) 5.3  Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.34  As the cask is removed from the water, the water inlet flow should be reduced and finally stopped as the top of the skirt surfaces from the pool. At all times the flow rate should be such that approximately al foot skirt overpressure is maintained. Control the crane speed to maintain but not exceed the one foot skirt overpressure.
5.3.35 - When vent hose connection "J2" reaches surface, remove the hose connection to short_en the drainage flow path. Disconnect from float line. Mate ends of hose together to form a circular hose. This prevents internal contamination of hose. Store hose.
5.3.36  Slowly remove the cask from the pool while thoroughly washing down the lift beam top, skirt and base of the cask with a water spray to remove particulate and soluble contaminates.
5.3.37  Disconnect "Jl" hose from water level control box.
5.3.38  Insert hose into Unit 2 transfer canal skirt.
Observe level inside skirt while draining; maintain this level approximately one foot above cask area water level by raising cask as required.
5.3.38.1   Obtain water sample from drain hose flow for isotopic analysis.


Cask From Truck (continued) 5 .1.18 5.1.19 5.1. 20 Apply Never-seeze grease to the lifting shoulder of front horizontal trunnions and to the engagement surface of the lifting arms. Position the lift beam over the front trunnions and engage the lift beam to the trunnions.
OP-4.3 Page 54 of 76 NOV 4  1983
Tilt the cask to the vertical position using the crane. Maintain crane and cables in a vertical position over lifting trunnions as the cask is tilted to the vertical position.
~  5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3    Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.39  When skirt has completely drained and cask has been pulled completely out of the water, disconnect "Jl" hose from "Jl" connection *
Lift the cask off* the tilting frame. Transfer the cask to the decon. area (Decon Bldg.), installing the bottom protective cover as the cask is lowered onto the pad per the following instructions:
            . 5. 3. 40 Position the crane above the open Decon Building access  doors and lower cask into the Decon building.
See figure 18. 5 .1. 20 .1 5 .1. 20. 2 5.1.20.3 Prior to lowering the cask onto the decontamination pad, place the Bottom Protective Cover onto the decontamination pad. Lower the cask until its bottom region is approximately 6 inches above the bottom cover. Manually lift the bottom cover and fit it onto the cask rear face (approximate weight 30 lb.).
5.3.41  Set cask down gently and disengage primary lifting beam from cask.
* ITIALS ._ OP-4.3 Page 25 of 76 NOV 4
5.3.42  Raise primary lifting beam back up into the Fuel building, and transfer to a position above the
* 1983 5. 0 Procedure' ( con tisued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.21 5 .1. 22 5 .1. 23 5 .1. 20. 4 5.1.20.5 NOTE: Attach the cover to the cask by looping the cover attachment cables over the lower cask trunnions and securing them to their attachment point on the bottom cover. Slowly lower the cask onto the decontamination pad. Start VDS warm-ur *. ( Disengage the lift beam and move it to the fuel bldg. for attachment of the lid lifting sling . Attach the lid lifting sling to the lift beam. Proceed to section 5.2 for Preparation of Cask prior to unloading.
-*            5.3.43 5.3.44 storage stand.
Date: ---------------
Decon lift beam and crane hook.
ITIALS 5.0
Dry all cask surfaces with clean rags as soon as practicable.
* OP-4.3 Page 26 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
5.3.45  Decontaminate exposed cask surfaces as necessary including outside of skirt.
5.3.46  Proceed to Section 5.4 for Preparation Of Cask For Departure.
Completed By:
Date:


===5.2 Preparation===
OP-4.3 Page 55 of 76
~
NOV 4  7933 5.0  Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure 5.4.1    Initial conditions are noted and satisfied.
5.4.2    Precautions and Limitations are noted.
5.4.3    Verify that the port plug from opening "D" is removed.
5.4.4    Remove water from bolt holes using an aspirator and install remaining lid bolts and tighten all lid bolts to the specified torque as follow:
Required Equipment
                          - torque wrench suitable for setting SQCIJ                  torques of 40 to 290 ft-lb SQC#                7/8" socket
                          - drive extension 5.4.4.1    Install all bolts and tighten to hand tight.
5.4.4.2     Tighten all bolts to 40 ft-lb in the following fashion:
5.4.4.3    Tighten the bolts to 40 ft-lb following the numerical sequence as shown in Figure 25.
5.4.4.4    Repeat the cycle of Step 5.4.4.3
____QC                              starting with bolt number 1 until all bolts are torqued to 40 ft-lb .


of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel. 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 Initial condition are noted and satisfied.
OP-4.3 Page 56 of 76 NOV 4 1983
Precautions and Limitations are noted. Skirt Operation Precautions The skirt's condition should be checked on a routine basis. Special attention to leakage inspections is advised. If leaks are identified, the area shall be patched using a reinforced plastic patch kit. Install the plastic protective skirt around the finned length of the cask per the instructions provided below: Skirt Installation Allen wrench -3/8 inch Crescent wrench (adjustable)
~
Never-Seeze grease, or site approved equivalent Waterproof tape Ratchet wrench Torque wrench 0-100# 3/8" hex set screw socket 5.2.3.1 Place plastic protective cover on top surface of cask.
~        5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.4.5      Tighten all lid bolts to the final
ITIALS 5.0 \I!:.->;~~
_ _ _ _QC                              required torque of 290 ft-lb by following the procedure in steps 5.4.4.3 and 5.4.4.4.
_;: I~ '.i OP-4.3 Page-:27 Nov 4 Procedure (continued)  
                            *5.4.4.6    Perform Lid Gasket Tightness Test per Addendum Ill.
5.4.5    Remove the blind flanges. from openings "B" and "C",
and thermocouple well port plugs "Fl", "F2" and "F3". Install thermocouples.
5.4.6    Install the CDS in the Cask Draining Mode as shown
* 5.4.7 on Figure 9. Drain the cask cavity water to the Decon Building sump until no more water comes out.
Remove shield plug from "A".
5.4.8    Connect the VDS to the cask cavity through shield plug opening "A" as shown on Figure 10, 12. Ensure valves V-2, V-3, V-4, V-5 and V-7 are closed and valve V-6 is open. Install drain bottle in Connector "C".
NOTE:   To facilitate operations, it is recommended that a curve be plotted of cask internal pressure (mbar) versus pumping time during cask drying .


===5.2 Preparation===
OP-4.3 Page 57 of 76 NOV 4  1983
                                                            '"J i 5.0 Procedure (contitiued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued)
            *5.4.9    Open valve V-2 and start the vacuum pump with the gas ballast valve open. Observe the cask cavity pressure using the gauge G-1 using valve V-6 to throttle the vacuum pump suction.
NOTE:    The cask cavity pressure will normally show an initial steep pressure decrease until a pressure corresponding to the vapor pressure of the residual liquid in the cavity is reached. At this point, the cask cavity pressure will remain nearly constant showing a plateau region. This plateau will be
* observed to be at a pressure e~?al to the vapor pressure corresponding to the temperature of the cold wall of the cask cavity (anticipated pressure:
14 mbar - 35 mbar).
5.4.10  When the vacuum reaches approximately 40 mbar, close valve V-6 and remove blind flange on "B" Connector (Fig. 14) to* break vacuum, forcing any water drain into the drain bottle.
CAUTION: Be careful to retain "O" Ring when removing flange; vacuum could suck it in if not careful .


of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued)
OP-4.3 Page 58 of 76
NOTE: 5.2.3.2 Remove the skirt from storage. Unroll it and inspect it to ensure that it is in an acceptable condition (i.e. no holes, acceptable contamination levels, etc.,) Check condition of skirt accessories, water hoses, connectors "Jl" and "J2" cables, cable tensioners, and screws. Grease screw threads if necessary.
                                    /, I -( ~                                      NOV 4 1983
Item numbers used in this section are shown in figures 20, 21, 22, 23, 24. 5.2.3.3 5.2.3.4 5.2.3.5 Insert the 2 pins (4) of the lower bar into the cask skirt lugs (11) and manually wrap the skirt around the cask utilizing the handles (5). Insert the 2 pins (3) of the upper bar into the corresponding holes of the skirt lower bar (2). Install the 13 screws (22) to close the skirt. Locate the upper skirt lateral guide (Ba) in the cask front drum groove. of 76 1983 5.0 * ~~*~7'1 ~*: :: :'..; *(:_-:'t.L
                                                                  .** "'7 ~
..ili Procedure (continued) (r\,; ,., . -. ;.: .. _ .. 1 :'..:;, OP-4.3 Page 28.of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.3.6 5.2.3.7 5.2.3.8 5.2.3.9 Position the cable as shown in Fig. 20 detail 1. The cable is wrapped "below" the lateral guide (i.e. between the lateral guide and the cask center). Wrap the cable once around the cask as shown in Fig. 20. Insert the cable under the upper bar (1) and into the drum groove (insert cable in groove shown in Fig. 20, detail 1 and wrap the cable around the cask a second time, while carefully positioning the cable in the cask drum groove, "below" the lateral guide (as shown in Fig. 20, detail 1). Pull the cable taut and check that the cable is correctly positioned in the drum groove. Insert the free end of the cable through the rotation drum hole (15) of the rotation drum (14) of the upper skirt cable tensioner (7). (Refer to Fig. 20 and Fig. 23) .
~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4   Preparation of .Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.11  Replace bind flange on "B" Connector, and open valve V-6 and continue pumping until the pressure is back down to approximately 40 mbar.     Continue to repeat this step as long as a level increase is observed in the drain bottle.
ITIALS 5.0
5.4.12  When no significant level increase in the drain bottle is noted, disconnect connnector "C" from the cask and continue vacuum pumping using valve V-6 to obtain a cavity pressure of approximately 20 mbar.
* OP-4.3 Page 29 of 76 .... -.. ,: . *. --~ NOV 4 1983 ...... -,.,: .... .,! .. *: Procedure (continued)  
NOTE:    Monitor the cask cavity internal pressure.             As the
* last of the residual moisture is removed by the vacuum pump, the internal pressure as monitored on gauge G-1 will show a second steep pressure decrease. Ensure the cask cavity pressure is not pumped below 7 mbar, which could cause freezing of the remaining water.
          *5.4.13  Measure the temperature (T) of the cask cavity walls*
using the thermocouples installed in wells "Fl",
                    "F2" and "F3".     Determine the water vapor pressure (P) in equilibrium with the coolest cavity wall temperature reading.
5.4.14  Continue vacuum drying until a pressure of less than
                    ~p (but not less than 7 mbar) is achieved) .


===5.2 Preparation===
                                                                                          .. ** 1 I
OP-4.3 Page 59 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued)
                  *5.4.15  Isolate the vacuum pump from the cavity by closing valve V-6. Record initial pressure and time on test data sheet.  (See Form 6)
                  *5.4.16  The cask cavity is considered dry if a rise in
_ _ _ _QC                  pressure does not exceed P/4 or 3.3 mbar, whichever is less, during a period of 10 minutes (record final pressure and time on test data sheet). See Form #6.
5.4.17  If the pressure increase exceeds the above limits, open valve V-6 and start vacuum pump for further vacuum drying. Continue to repeat dryness verification until criteria of Step 5.4.16 are met.
5.4.18  Upon successfui completion of the cask cavity dryness verification, disconnect the VDS by disconnecting connector "Al" from the Shield Plug opening "A".
5.4.19  Reinstall shield plug "A" and torque bolts to 35 ft.
                            - lbs. in a clockwise direction from the first bolt.
5.4.20  Repeat the torquing of the bolts to 35 ft. - lbs.
_ _ _ _QC                  in a counter-clockwise direction.
5.4.21  Readjust the VDS to place it in the Evacuation Mode as shown in Figure 11.
5.4.21.1    Perform Cask Tightness Test per Addendum 2.


of Cask for Lo-ading Spent-Fuel ( continued) 5.2.3.10 5.2.3.11 5.2.3.12 5. 2. 3 .. 13 Lock the cable by tightening the cable locking screw (16). (Fig. 23) Attach the locking 0-rings (18) to the locking handles (17) as shown in Figure 23 (the 0-ring forces the locking handles down onto the rotational drums (14) and prevents rotation.
OP-4.3 Page 60 of 76 NOV 4  1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued)
This keeps the cables under tension).
        *5.4.22  Adjust the cask cavity internal pressure to 0.3 bars, absolute (-10 psig) using valve V-3 (not connected to the gaseous radwaste discharge line) as a vent to atmospheric pressure and by the operation of the vacuum pump (valve V-6 must be open during vacuum pump operation). Record the final pressure on the "Cask Loading Report".
Attach wrenches to the cable tensioning nuts (19) and turn the rotation drums as indicated by arrows in section AA of Fig. 24. Turn both drums at the same time. The locking handle should be pulled up to allow the rotation drum to turn. When the cable is sufficiently tensioned, push the locking handle (17) firmly down to ensure that it is seated against the rotation drum (14). (Fig. 23) Locate the lower lateral guide (8b) in the cask rear drum groove. (Fig. 20) 5.0 OP-4.3 Page 30 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
5.4.23  Remove the VDS including Connector "B".
5.4.24  Remove the tape and plugs from the cask front face bolt holes.
5.4.25  Check external contamination of all exposed surfaces of the cask and decontaminate as required.
5.4.26  Survey the recesses for openings "B" and "C".
5.4.27  Remove thermocouples and replace well port plugs "Fl", "F2" and "F3", port plug "D" and the blind flanges for openings "B" and "C", and tighten all bolts and plugs to the specified torque per the following instructions:
5.4.27.1    Thermocouple well port plugs "Fl", "F2" and "F3" and port plug "D". One torque wrench equipped with a 1-3/8" socket, suitable for setting torques of 35 ft-lb is required.


===5.2 Preparation===
OP-4.3 Page 61 of 76 NOV 4 ITIALS                                                                              1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.27.2    Install plug to hand tight, then torque
_ _ _ _QC                              to 35 ft-lb.
5.4.27.3    Bolts for the blind flanges of openings "B", and "C".
One torque wrench equipped with a 3/8"
                                        -hex set screw socket, suitable for setting torques of 35 ft-lb is required.
5.4.27.4    Install the three boh: :,. for each flange f .
i and torque the bolts to 35 ft-lb in a clockwise direction from the first bolt.
5.4.27.5    Repeat the torquing of the bolts to 35
_ _ _ _QC                              ft-lb in a counter clockwise direction.
5.4.28  Remove the protective skirt as follows:
NOTE:    Do not remove the skirt until all required external cask decontamination operations are complete.
Removal of the skirt prior to the completion of these steps risks contamination of the cask fins.
5.4.28.l    Remove connectors "Jl" and "J2".
5.4.28.2   Remove any remaining tape from the upper and lower skirt edges and unwrap the tensioning cables, freeing the skirt from the drum grooves
* OP-4.3 Page 62 of 76 NOV 4  1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.28.3    Remove the 13 screws from the upper and lower skirtbars.  (Note: Remove the bolts from bottom to top).
5.4.28.4    Check that both the upper and lower lateral guides are free of the drum grooves.
5.4.28.5    Remove the skirt from the cask using the skirt handles (Fig. 20) (5). Hang skirt on storage ring.
5.4.28.6    Check the skirt contamination level.
Decontaminate if necessary until acceptable levels are attained.
Normally, washing the skirt with clean water and a soft cloth is sufficient to decontaminate the skirt.
5.4.29  Survey the cask/skirt joints now exposed and the finned surfaces of the cask for contamination and decontamina_te as required. Reinstall flanges "Jl" and "J2" and torque 3/8" hex head bolts to 35 ft-lb.
5.4.30  Transfer cask crane to a position above the cask and lower lift beam.
5.4.31  Grease the surfaces of the lift beam arms, outer front trunnion shoulders and rear trunnion inner
* shoulders with Never-Seeze.


of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.4 5.2.3.14 5.2.3.15 Repeat steps 5.2.3.5 through 5.2.3.12 for the lower skirt cable tensioner (6) (the cables placed between the lateral guide and the center of the cask). Install a layer of water proof tape along the upper and lower edges of the skirt as shown on Fig. 20, detail 1. Tape also to be installed over the upper bar after the screws have been installed.
OP-4.3 Page 63'of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.32  Re-engage lift beam arms (see 5.3.3) and lift the cask off the decontamination pad and remove the Bottom Protective Cover per the following instructions:
This reduces skirt water supply requirements by improving the skirt sealing. Remove the .blind flanges from openings "Jl" and "JZ" and install the connectors "Jl and "J2" and torque the bolts to 35 ft-lb per the following instructions:
5.4.32.1   Disconnect the bottom cover attachment cables from the cask trunnions and fold them to the side of the cover so they are not in the way.
5.2.4.1 5.2.4.2 One torque wrench equipped with a 3/8 hex set screw socket suitable for setting torques or 35 ft-lbs is required.
5.4.32.2    Slowly lift the cask off the decontamination pad. As the cask is lifted, remove the bottom cover from the cask. Decon the cask bottom surface.
Install the three bolts for each flange and torque the bolts to 35 ft-lbs in counter :lockwise direction.
5.4.32.3    Check the bottom cover for contamination. Decontaminate as needed.
ITIALS 5.0
5.4.32.4   Transfer the cover to its storage area.
* OP-4.3 Page 31 of 76 -.. -~"'-' NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
5.4.33  Remove tape from alignment pin and bolt holes and survey for removable contamination and decontaminate the rear cask face as required.
Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.4.3 Repeat the torquing of the bolts to 35 ft-lb in a counter clockwise direction.
5.4.34  Transfer the cask to a position over the rear trunnion supports of the tilting frame.
Remove the blind flange from opening "B" using the 3/8 inch hex set screw socket. Perform radiation survey of the exposed recess of opening "B" (y at contact) Seal the cask front face shock absorbing cover bolt and alignment pin holes by applying two layers over each hole. Remove grease from all trunnions except for areas that come in contact with the lifting arms during handling between the decontamination pad and the pool. Equalize the cask cavity atmosphere as follows: 5.2.9.1 NOTE: Install the VDS in the Sampling Mode as shown on Figure 7. Ensure valves V-1, V-2 and V-3 ar closed and Connection "B" is blanked off at the 2 inch vacuum hose connection prior to connecting to the cask, (and sample cylinder is attached, optional).
5.4.35  Grease rear trunnion supports with Never-Seeze grease.
Cask sampling will be optional as desired by the fuel handling supervisor


===5.0 Procedure===
OP-4.3 Page 64 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued)                       -*,.E, 5.Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.36  Lower the cask bottom trunnions onto the tilting frame rear trunnion supports.
(continued)
NOTE:    Cask should be oriented such that drain "C" will face upward, after cask is tilted into a horizontal position.
OP-4.3 Page 32 NOV 4 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.9.2 5.2.9.3 NOTE: Measure t.he cask internal cavity pressure by opening valve V-2 and reading the pressure off gauge G-1. Close valve V-2. Dependent upon the measured cask internal cavity pressure, perform the following:
5.4.37  Carefully rotate cask to horizontal position.
If the measured pressure is less than atmospheric, vent the cask cavity to atmosphere by disconnecting 2" blank from the "B" connector.
CAUTION: Maintain crane and crane cables in a vertical position over lifting trunnions while performing tilting of cask.
See Figure 7 and 14. Insure the Decon bldg. exhaust vent is in service and is in the filter mode. If the measured pressure is greater than atmospheric, release cask pressure by opening valve V-3 thereby venting the cask cavity to gaseous radwaste.
5~4.38  Disengage the lifting beam from the cask and return it to its storage stand in the Fuel Building.
Discharge line is connected to valve V-3 prior to opening valve V-3. When cask is at atmospheric pressure, close valve V-3. of 76 1983 ITIALS 5.0 .-OP-4.3 . Page 33 of 76 :--,:.. .,.., ... -n::...,.:~7 V ."l:i.-L. ** :;~&deg;k~:~[~
5.4.39  Perform contamination survey required by H.P. on cask surfaces inaccessible after shock absorbing cover and impact limiter installation.
NOV 4 Procedure (continued)
5.4.40  After releasing lift beam from cask crane main hook, position main hook over horizontal lifting beam
* OP-4.3 Page 65 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4   Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued).
5.4.41  Lower main hook between the yoke plated, insert the pin, and lock the pin in place with the keeper plate.
5.4.42  Return truck and trailer to the loading/unloading position as indicated by reference mark established in Step 5.1.8 - "Unloading Cask From Truck".
5.4.43  Raise the horizontal lift beam clear of its supports and rotate it on the hook swivel so that the front end (short pendants) is oriented toward the front of the cask. Raise high enought for the trunnion plates to clear the cask. Traverse the beam directly over the ~ask. Grease the bearing surfaces of the lifting pendants and the lifting trunnions of the cask with Never-Seeze.
5.4.44  Lower the beam slowly and guide the trunnion plates past the trunnions until they can be slipped on.
Raise the locking bars, slip the plates over the trunnions and release the locking bars so that they rest on the trunnions inside the trunnion lip thus preventing the plates from coming off .


===5.2 Preparation===
OP-4.3 Page 66 of 76 NOV 4  1983
                                                .... ~:.      ' -/
5.0 Procedure (continued)                                          *,
d    ..
5.Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.45  The cask should be raised carefully until it is clear above the supports. The front will rise about 8 inches before the rear trunnions lift off their supports. If, at this time, it appears necessary to control lateral movement of the cask, ropes should be attached at the trunnions and held on the ground.
5.4.46  The cask shall be raised high enough to clear its supports on the trailer and rotated 90&deg; to align with trailer.
5;4.47  Raise cask to an elevation sufficient to clear the tarpaulin rails and position over trailer.
5.4.48  The cask is lowered onto the trailer.                    Slight traversing of the crane may be required to center the rear trunnions within~ inch in their supports.
Once the rear trunnions are in contact the cask can be fully lowered.
5.4.49  With the pendants slack, the locking bars can be raised and the trunnion plates removed :rom the trunnions. Raise the horizontal lift beam and traverse to the storage* supports.
5.4.50  Lower the horizontal lift beam onto the supports.
Disengage the hook pin, raise the hook, store the pin .


of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued)
OP-4.3 Page 67 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.Preparation of Cask for Departure 5.4.51  Position the cask crane to facilitate the installation of the shock absorbing covers.
NOTE: NOTE: N/A steps 5.2.9.4 thru 5.2.12 if fuel handling supervisor desires sampling to be deleted. VDS pump must be started for this evolution.
5.4.52  Perform rear trunnion, front trunnion and trunnion guide assembly tie-down operations per the following instructions:
5.2.9.4 5.2.9.5 5.2.9.6 5.2.9.7 5.2.9.8 5.2.9.9 5.2.9.10 5.2.9.11 Purge the gaseous sample cylinder, "B" connector and associated piping as follows: Remove the "B" Connector with sample cylinder from cask. Open valves V-1, V-2 and V-3. Start vacuum pump and run for three minutes to evacuate sample cylinder, "B" Connector and associated piping. Close valves V-1, V-2, V-3 and stop vacuum pump. Reconnect "B" Connector with sample cylinder to cask Hansen Coupling at "B" flange opening. Open valves V-1 and V-2 to draw sample from cask cavity into sample cylinder.
Required Equipment
After collecting the sample, isolate the sample cylinder by closing valves V-1 and V-2; then remove "B" Connector from cask. 1983 5.0
                            - Ratchet
* OP-4.3 Page 34 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued) 5.2 I Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.10 NOTE: 5.2.9.12 Remove the sample flask and analyze cask gaseous.activity for fission gas content. Initiate Cask Filling as follows: Refer to Figures 2, 8, 12, 15 and 13 5.2.10.1 5.2.10.2 .Remove the blind flange form opening "C" and survey the recess. Remove the shield plug from opening "A". When removing or working i? the area of shield plug "A", care should be exercised as radiation streaming may be present. 5.2.10.3 Install the CDS in the Cask Filling/Cooling Mode as shown in Figure 8. Install Connectors "A2", install the three bolts and torque to 35 ft-lb as per steps 5.2.4.1 thru 5.2.4.3 (Fig 13). Ensure valve line-up is as shown with valves V-9 and V-10, V-11, V-12 closed .
                            - 3/4 inch socket (front trunnion guide assembly bolts)
5.0 OP-4.3 Page 35 of 76 '.*-:-.... -, .. '.. NOV 4 1983 *,,*, . " , .. ,.:.:: :J/,IL f Procedure (continued) 5.2 *' .. Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued)
                            - 13/16 inch socket
NOTE: 5.2.10.4 5.2.10.5 5.2.10.6 5.2.10.7 5.2.10.8 5.2.10.9 Open valve V-9, and V-11. DELETE Initiate filling water ~low through the CDS by opening valve V-10. Establish a cask cavity filling water inlet flow rate by throttling valve V-10. Continue to fill the cask cavity through connector "C". DELETE When no entrained air is visible in vent hose flow, stop the flow of fill water. Close valve V-10, open V-12. Remove Connector "A2" and Connectors "C" and drain the CDS lines. 5.2.10.10
                            - Torque wrench (suitable for setting torques of 30 and 125 ft-lbs) 1/8 open end wrench
*Install shield plug "A" without bolts. Since the shield plug "A" is not torqued, the cask cavity is vented providing thermal expansion protection.
                            - Ratchet drive extension 5.4.53  Install the rear trunnion tie-down as follows:
5.0 QC
Rear Trunnions 5.4.53.1    Place the trunnion tie-down collars over
* P~ocedure (continued) . ,,* .., ' ..... :_*.:; . :\3 ..... ,:~ *; *1r; OP-4.3 Page 36 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.10.11 5.2.10.12 5.2.10.13 Attach a drain line to Connector "C" and reinstall Connector "C" to the cask to adjust the cask water level until it is approximately twelve (12) inches below the top of the cask lid. (i.e. drain 2 gallons).
                                      . the rear trunnions.
Disconnect Connector "C" from the cask (Hansen coupling at "C" is self-sealing).
5.4.53.2     Install the two 3/4 inch bolts (with their lock washers) to hand tight.
Visually inpsect the gaskets of the blind flanges for "B" and "C" to ensure they are free of cuts, grooves, gouges or cracks. Particular attention should be given to observe "feathering" at teh edges. An indication of normal conditions will be that the seating surface appears as a somewhat flattened area. If the inpsection indicates a gasket defect, the gasket should be replaced
NOTE:    Ensure that the bolt threads contain an acceptable grease coating. Ensure that the bolt lock washers are installed .
* ITIALS 5.0 * ------------------
OP-4.3 Page 37 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)


===5.2 Preparation===
OP-4.3 Page 68 *of 76 Nov 4  1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.53.3    Install the rear trunnion support bolts and tighten each to a torque of 125 ft-lb. Repeat for second rear trunnion.
5.4.54  Front Trunnions 5.4.54.1    Swing the binder assembly over the cask trunnion.
5.4.54.2   Verify that the collar is correctly positioned on the trunnion inside shoulder. The position of the collar should be such that it restrains the top
* half of the trunnion shoulder. If necessary, adjust the collar position, by performing Step 5.4.56.
5.4.54.3    With the binder handle in the up position, engage the binder attachment hook under the trunnion tie-down support lip.*
5.4.54.4    Push the binder handle down to the full down position. Verify that the collar I
is tight against the cask trunnion. If it is not, adjust the tie-down assembly by performing Step 5.4.56
* OP-4.3 Page 69 of 76 NDV 4  1983 NITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.54.5    Lock the binder in its down position by securing the binder handle restraint chain in the trailer chain securing hook.
5.4.54.6    Repeat Steps 5.4.54.1 through 5.4.54.5 for the second front trunnion.
5.4.55  Trunnion Guide Assembly Installation 5.4.55.1    Swing back the trailer front cradle dust cover plate.
5.4.55.2    Install the trunnion guide assembly around the cask bottom trunnion.
5.4.55.3    Install the two~" bolts with their lock washers.
NOTE:    Grease the bolt threads as needed prior to installation.
5.4.55.4    Torque the two~" boits to a torque of 30 ft-lbs.
5.4.56  Front Trunnion Tie-Down Adjustment (N/A if not necessary) 5.4.56.1    Using two* 1-!i;" open end wrenches, adjust the lock nuts which secure the collar to the 3/4" tie-down rod. These nuts should be turned to raise or lower the
* collar as needed.


of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.11 5.2.12 5.2.13 5.2.14 5.2.10.14 Reinstall.
OP-4.3 Page 70 of 76 NOV 4 . 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.56.2     Position the tie-down assembly over the trunnion and verify that the adjustment is correct.
the flanges of openings "B" and "C" per the procedure in Steps 5.2.4.1 -5.2.4.3 and tape flanges. Remove the port plug from opening "D". See Figure 2. Loosen and remove lid bolts per the following procedure:
5.4.56.3     Tighten lock nuts (upper and lower) tight against the collar and each other to ensure that they do not loosen.
See Figure 25. 5.2.12.1 Select one bolt and loosen 1/4 turn. 5.2.12.2 Continue loosening all remaining bolts by 1/4 turn following the sequence as numbered on Figure 25.
5.4.57  Replace the shock absorbing covers per the following instructions. The weight of each cover is approximately 879 lb.
* 5.2.12.3 5.2.12.4 5.2.12.5 Repeat the loosening of the lid bolts by another 1/4 turn by repeating the procedure in steps 5.2.12.1 and 5.2.12.2.
Required Equipment
Upon completion of both 1/4 turn cycles, all the bolts may then be removed. Inspect removed bolts for damage, store and protect bolts from contamination in bolt storage box. Remove plastic protective cover from top surface of cask. Proceed to Section 5.3 for loading of cask. Completed By: ----------------
                          - 2 legged sling equipped with connections to allow attachment to the lifting crane hook (bale) and to the cover connecting shackles (loops, etc.).
Date: ----------------
                          - 2 connecting shackles
-1 ITIALS 5.0 OP-4.3 Page 38 of 76 NOV 4 1983 .-:--Ptoced1Ire (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 Apply never-seeze grease to lifting trunnions on areas that come in contact with lifting arms during cask handling between the decontamination pad and the spent fuel cask area of the pool. Position lifting beam (still attached to cask crane main hook) over the cask. Connect air system to lifting beam and insure operability as follows: (Refer to figure 4). 5.3.3.1 5.3.3.2 5.3.3.3 5.3.3.4 Connect the air controller to an air supply of 75-100 PSIG. Attach as many 50 ft. long sections of flexible hose to the three quick-connectors on the air controller as needed. The hoses and quick connectors are color coded to assure proper connection.
                          - Ratchet
* Connect the three hoses to the fittings on the right hand side of the beam as one faces the side with the piping. (hoses, piping and air controller are color coded). Verify that the bypass toggle valves on the beams are in the closed position.
                          - Ratchet drive extension 7/8 inch socket Torque wrench suitable for setting torques of 40 and 290 ft-lbs.
ITIALS 5.0 *
                          - ~ ton chain fall with dynamometer 5.4.57.1    Attach the 2 legged sling to the 2 lifting lugs of the shock absorbing cover by means of the 2 connecting shackles.
* L OP-4.3 Page 39 of 76 ;.;*~~~ tj.~ ; . ';,* NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.3.5 Observe whether the lifting arms are in the released or engaged position.
Set the arm control lever on the air controller to the same position.
5.3.3.6 Set the green handle of the locking cylinder valve to the "locked" position.
5.3.3.7 Depress the black handled toggle valve on the air controller until line pressure is indicated on the pressure gauge. Releasing the toggle will close this valve. NOTE: The system is now operational.
It is always operated in the following sequence:
Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "unlocked".
Move the arm positioning lever to the desired position.
Lifting beam latching mechanism fails to "engaged" position.
Air may be disconnected once engaged for ease of movement of cask. Visually verify that the arms have moved fully to the desired position.
Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "locked" .
TIALS 5.0
* OP-4.3 Page 40 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Pr.ocedure (continued)
'"' .. < ,*' ~* -. *' j; ._. .-~ ... I. 5.3 Cask Loading (continued)
CAUTION: Do not attempt to move the arms when the green handle is on "locked".
However, if this should happen, return the arm positioning lever to the position corresponding with the current position of the arm of the beam before opening (unlocking) the locking cylinder.
When the system is in the "locked" position, visual confirmation is provided by small metal flags which are moved by the end of the locking pin. These flags extend horizontally when the system is fully locked and can be seen from the surface of the pool when the cask is under water. The location of these flags may influence the position of the beam with respect to the cask (i.e., whether 180&deg; rotation is desired) before the cask goes into the pool
* ITIALS 5.0 * .-.~. -. OP-4.3 Page 41 NOV 4 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 Note that the arm repositioning will take a few seconds more if: The air lines are especially long Air pressure is on the low side The system is in redundant configuration Allow sufficient time before returning the green handled valves to the "locked" position.
-Lower the lifting beam into position with th_e guide arms resting on the top surface of cask trunnions.
Attach the lid lifting sling to the cask lid. Make trial lid lifts, adjusting the lifting sling as necessary so that the lid raises in a level attitude and no binding relative to the cask occurs. Engage the lifting beam to cask trunnions as described in note in Step 5.3.3. Install four lid bolts hand tight. Lift the cask off the decontamination pad and transfer to the Fuel Building . .of 76 1983 ITIALS * :-..,_ OP-4.3 Page 42 of 76 NOV 4 1983 . . . Llj tJ~&#xa3;J~*,~&#xa3;


===5.0 Procedure===
OP-4.3 Page 71 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.57.2    Center the crane auxiliary hook directly over the shock absorbing cover to be handled. There.is no preference in the shock absorbing cover installation sequence; either may be installed first.
(continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.8 5.3.9 5.3.10 NOTE: 5.3.11 Rotate the cask to orient the skirt fill and vent connections
Lower the crane auxiliary hook. Attach chain fall and dynamometer assembly to auxiliary hook.
("Jl" and "J2") in order to facilitate connection and disconnection when cask is in the water. (See Figure 26). Attach the fill hose to "Jl" when cask is in position over the spent fuel pit cask area. Lower the cask into the cask area while filling the skirt volume with cond. water such that the skirt internal volume water level is maintained approximately 6 11 to 12" above the cask area water surface. When cask is in position establish reference mark on floor (use plumb bob suspended from cab of crane) for future alignment of crane. Reduce crane speed and water flow rate into the skirt as the skirt water level approaches the top of the skirt. When the entire skirt volume is full (indicated.by water issuing from the "J2" port), connect floating vent to connector "J2", and tie off float at floor level allowing _overflow to return to the s.F.P * 
5.4.57.3   Attach the 2 legged sling lifting bale to the dynamometer.
-5.0 OP-4.3 Page 43 *of 76 **--* :, -. , -.,. -NOV 4 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.12 Disconnect water fill line from cond. hose and connect to water level box. CAUTION: Ensure water fill line is held approximately one 5.3.13 NOTE: 5.3.14 5.3.15 NOTE: half(~) foot above vent at all time during this step. Make up to water level box with cond. hose. Maintain an approximate one-half(~)
5.4.57.4    Slowly raise the crane auxiliary hook until the sling legs are taut.
foot water head over-pressure inside the skirt by maintaining the water level in the water level box approximately one half(~) foot above the vent. This prevents inleakage of contaminated water, and must be maintained at all times while cask is submerged.
5.4.57.5   Transfer the shock absorbing cover to its respective end of the cask.
5.3.13.*1 Remove the four remaining lid bolts and place them in the bolt box. Continue lowering the cask to the cask pad at normal crane speed while continuing to maintain the one-half(~)
NOTE:   The shock absorbing covers are~ interchangeable.
foot of water over-pressure in the skirt. Gently place the cask on the pad. (Figure 26). Utilize underwater camera as an aid to determine distance when cask is approaching bottom. 1983 
5.4.57.6    Lower the shock absorbing cover such that its centering pins are in alignment with the cask alignment pin holes. Use chain fall for fine adjustments during alignment
~ITIALS OP-4.3 Page 44 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.16 5.3.17 NOTE: 5.3.18 5.3.19 5.3.20 Release the lifting beam from the cask. (Refer to Section 5.3.3 -Air Locking System Instructions).
* OP-4.3 Page 72 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.57.7   Install ~he cover by slowly moving the cover toward the cask face. Care should be taken to ensure that the alignment pin holes are aligned correctly and the covers remain vertical during installation. It is recommended that a dynamometer be used to ensure that excessive force is not applied to the bolts.
Remove the cask lid as follows: 5.3.17.1 5.3.17.2 Slowly raise the crane hook in "jog" speed until the cable is slightly taut. Note the height of the crane hook cables. (This is done by noting a reference point on the crane cables, etc.). Slowly raise the cask lid in the jog speed until the lid lifts freely out of the lid recess area. Reference mark the crane position.
.-                 5.4.58  Install the four shock absorbing cover bolts and torque them as follows:
If the lid shows signs of binding, lower the crane hook until the cable is slack and carefully check the crane hook vertical .. alignment over the lid center and _adjust as necessary.
5.4.58.1   Install all cover bolts and tighten to hand tight.
Repeat steps 5.3.17.1 and 5.3.17.2 as needed. Once lid is free, continue lifting the lid in normal speed. Raise the lifting beam from the cask area. Wash down the main hook, cables and lift beam with P.G. water as they exit the pool.
5.4.58.2   Tighten all bolts to 40 ft-lb. in the following fashion.
ITIALS 5.0 *
(a) Following the numerical sequence shown in Figure (b), tighten the bolts to 40 ft-lb.
* OP-4.3 Page 45 of 76 NOV 4 . 1983 ... *, .. 1;:.: ~* Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.21 Install the Front Face Protective Cover per the instructions below and as shown on Fig. 19. Fuel pit bridge may be used as a working platform.
(b) Repeat the cycle until all bolts are torqued to 40 ft-lb.
5.3.21.l Attach a tag line to each cover handling cable. CAUTION: Prior to bridge travel, ensure there are not NOTE: obstructions.
5.4.58.3   Tighten all cover bolts to the final required torque to 290 ft-lb by following the procedure in 5.4.58.2 (a)
5.3.21.2 5.3.21.3 Orient the cover over the lid recess area such that the 2 lid centering pins are in alignment with the b*osses of the cover. Lower the cover onto the cask until it is fully down (i.e. slack cable). The cover is designed such that the edges of the cover will center it correctly.
* and (b).
If the cover position is not correct, slowly lift the cover clear, adjust its position as needed by rotating t~e crane hook and repeat Steps 5.3.21.2 and 5.3.21.3.
Utilize underwater camera as necessary .
5.0
* rr~ r ,, ... *' 1 ;_:' OP-4.3 Page 46 of 76 NOV 4 7983 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued)  
*5.3.22 5.3.21.4 Using the tag lines, position the cables such that they hang along the side of the cask and are out of the way of fuel unloading operations.
Tie off ends of tag lines at operating level. Per the instructions below, load the fuel assemblies into the cask cavity. Fuel Resources will verify each fuel assembly I.D. number, ANSI number and cask location.
Record the position of each fuel assembly and insert component (if applicable) in the "Cask Loading Report". Refer to VNF-7 for fuel locations and see Figure 28 for fuel orientation in the cask." NOTES: 1. Any lateral position adjustments of the fuel handling tool must be done with the fuel assembly outside the cask fuel compartments during loading operations or with the fuel assembly disengaged from the fuel handling tool during.unloading operations (unless otherwise specified in these instructions).
: 2. It is recommended that reference height indications be marked on the fuel handling equipment such that they can be referred to, to assist in determining fuel assembly heights .
5.0
* OP-4.3 Page 47 of 76 NOV 4 Procedure (continued)
**~ :: 5.3 :~il"~.~j Cask Loading (continued)
NOTES: (continued)
: 3. During all fuel transfer operations performed in the pool, ensure that the fuel assemblies are free of all obstacles throughout transfer.
: 4. Fuel Resources personnel will be notified prior to any fuel movements.
Fuel Assembly Loading 5.3.22.1 5.3.22.2 5.3.22.3 Attach the fuel handling tool and load scale to the bridge crane hook, adding a safety sling between the hook and the tool. Transfer the fuel handling tool to a point directly over the fuel assembly to be loaded into the cask. Refer to VNF-7. Verify that the fuel handling tool is centered over the desired fuel assembly.
If it is not, adjust its position as needed. Ensure that the fuel handling tool is free of any obstacles during these adjustments.
1983 5.0 *
* OP-4.3 Page 48 of 76 .NOV 4 1983 :.,...,_ Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.22.4 5.3.22.5 5.3.22.6 5.3.22.7 5.3.22.8 5.3.22.9 When alignment is satisfactory, slowly begin lowering the fuel handling tool onto the fuel assembly.
Continue lowering the fuel handling tool until it is completely down on the fuel assembly (i.e. no weight on load cell). Engage the fuel assembly with the fuel ** *
* handling tool and .lock handle. f ' . Slowly raise the fuel assembly while closely monitoring the load scale for excessive load changes. Continue slowly lifting the fuel assembly until its bottom nozzle is above the storage racks. Transfer the fuel assembly to its spent fuel cask location.
Refer .to VNF-7, and Figure 28. 5. 3. 22 .10 . Slowly lower the fuel assembly into the designated spent fuel cask location while closely monitoring the load scale for excessive load changes. After the fuel assembly seats on the bottom of the cask, disengage the fuel handling tool from the fuel assembly."
ITIALS 5.0 -----* *---. ------*----------***----
*-*--* ---*-**--****-***--*-***-
*-****--**-***
----.. OP-4.3 Page 49 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
-*~~-5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.23 5.3.24 5 .3 .22.11 5.3.22.12 Repeat Steps 5.3.22.2 thru 5.3.22.10 until the cask is load. Store the fuel handling tool in its storage area and disconnect it" from the crane hook. Remove the front face protective cover from the cask: 5.3.23.1 5.3.23.2 Slowly remove the cover from the front face by lifting the tag lines. Verify that cover is removed without binding, etc. Transfer the cover to its storage area and store properly.
Replace the cask lid on the cask per the following instructions:
* 5.3.24.1 Transfer th_e lid to the position directly over the cask cavity lid _ seating surface using cask area crane by positioning crane at reference mark established in Step 5.3.17.2. 
.ITIALS 5.0
* OP-4.3 Page 50 of 76 NOV 4 . 1983 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued)
NOTE: NOTE: 5.3.24.2 Establish correct cask cavity lid orientation (orientation markers) and lower it to a height of about 4 feet above the cask. Check lid alignment and orientation as needed. This a~ignment is important and should be done carefully.
Angular orientation is to be established by lining up the cask and lid orientation marks prior to installing the lid. The lid should be rotated as needed. 5.3.24.3 Slowly lower the lid into the lid recess. Lateral and rotational adjustments of the lid may be made as the lid nears the cask front face but no lateral movement of the crane should be made once the lid has entered the lid recess. If further lid position adjustments are needed, the lid should be lifted unt~l it is free of the lid recess and above the cask. 5.3.24.4 If the lid indicates significant binding during crane descent, slowly raise the lid in the jog made until it is again free of binding and raise the lid out of the lid recess. Check the lid alignment and repeat Steps 5.3.24.2 and 5.3.24.3. 
* *
* VIRGi/JIA EL'ECTR1 C .t-.1\'V PO[{=R COMPANY SURR,' PC)(t 1~R STA TIO/\ PROCEf'URE
*-. -*-(3) T~'P~ PROCEDURE:
OPERATIONS PROCEDURE TTTL'E: IRRADIATED FUEL -* .. _-:_.-. -----*' ;*.*:~ Q.UAL7T\'
COI-JITOL APPROVED STAT1 O,~ HANDLING & SHIPMENT LIST OF EFFECTIVE REV1S10NS:
SECTIOI--'
1.0 2.0 . ,; :-3
* 0. :*) ,. . . '~ -< 4
* o :_;: ~;,;i::T>r<
*. *._ ~--*._ *-* **"::::* _:: ~. 3 . o-_*.:, . ; . ~;.-; /-'.ATTACHMENT I ; . *' _ .. .,.. .'j.** DATE . tt~'.J. 4 19S3 *:*:~;!~:*
-* -. C ... * ... .":./ .-NOV 4 1983 .... :*' :1 *.\, :NOV.: 4 1983 .... -*:** :*. : ,. NOV 4 1983 ---* ;..,,-** NOV 4 1983 NOV 4 1~3:. NOV 4 ~.";,:. ATTACHMENT II ATTACHMENT
:~~! ATTACHMENT I.;'.
* NOV 4 ._:* t983_.) .-.~~....
:**_;." ::-1983 ( 7) ,"-._ .. . ./ I o *' .. ! _\_~, .. '\._.I_/ ( \ ';f J / I : * ) A,"l OPER.l. T1 NG COMlJ.TTTEE: , --t:"" 1'C='l")up=
' ""' '-v ,_ OP-4 3 NUMBER:
* DATE: ~NOV 4 1983 UNTT #: 1 & 2 :: -~---: DATE: II VATE: ,.,.,, DATE: NOV 4 198] I -., \.-i ( 2) ( !; ) (5) ( 6) ( :.: ) (:...:.)
5.0
* ____ QC OP-4.3 Page 51 of 76 NOV ,4 1983 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued)
NOTE: 5.3.24.5 As the lid nears its full down position, ensure that the 2 centering pins are protruding through their respective lid flange holes. Use binoculars and/or underwater camera as needed to perform this evolution.
5.3.24.6 5.3.24.7 5.3.24.8 If they do not protrude stop crane descent. Slowly raise the lid a few inches. Twist the crane hook in whichever direction is needed by referencing the lid orientation marks. Return to Step 5.3.24.3 and continue lid installation.
Continue lowering until the lid is fully down as indicated by slack cable in the sling cables. Visually verify the lid for proper installation. (i.e. visual looks to be seated and the alignment pins protrude from the lid plate).
5.0 .-OP-4.3 Page 52 of 76 NOV 4 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.25 5.3.26 5.3.27 5.3.28 5.3.29 5.3.30 NOTE: 5.3.31 5.3.32 5.3.33 Lower the lifting beam slowly until its guide arms are resting on shoulders of lifting trunnions.
Engage the primary lift beam to the cask lifting trunnions as outlined in Step 5.3.3. Raise the cask from the bottom of the cask area. Continue raising cask until top face is approximately even with operating deck. Check and grease (using Never-Seeze) the threads of all removed cask bolts and screws as needed. Remove water from four bolt holes (with an aspirator) prior to returning four lid bolts which were removed in Step 5.3.13.1.
Each bolt is associated with a specific bolt hole. Check bolt number with hole number. Replace the above mentioned lid bolts in their respective hole and hand tighten. Remove four legged sling from lid lifting lugs by removing fo~r shackles.
Continue raising cask form the SFP. 1983 5.0 OP-4.3 Page 53 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Ptoeedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.34 As the cask is removed from the water, the water inlet flow should be reduced and finally stopped as the top of the skirt surfaces from the pool. At all times the flow rate should be such that approximately al foot skirt overpressure is maintained.
Control the crane speed to maintain but not exceed the one foot skirt overpressure.
5.3.35 -When vent hose connection "J2" reaches surface, remove the hose connection to short_en the drainage flow path. Disconnect from float line. Mate ends of hose together to form a circular hose. This 5.3.36 5.3.37 5.3.38 prevents internal contamination of hose. Store hose. Slowly remove the cask from the pool while thoroughly washing down the lift beam top, skirt and base of the cask with a water spray to remove particulate and soluble contaminates.
Disconnect "Jl" hose from water level control box. Insert hose into Unit 2 transfer canal skirt. Observe level inside skirt while draining; maintain this level approximately one foot above cask area water level by raising cask as required.
5.3.38.1 Obtain water sample from drain hose flow for isotopic analysis.
5.0 -*
* OP-4.3 Page 54 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.39 . 5. 3. 40 5.3.41 5.3.42 5.3.43 5.3.44 5.3.45 5.3.46 When skirt has completely drained and cask has been pulled completely out of the water, disconnect "Jl" hose from "Jl" connection
* Position the crane above the open Decon Building access doors and lower cask into the Decon building.
Set cask down gently and disengage primary lifting beam from cask. Raise primary lifting beam back up into the Fuel building, and transfer to a position above the storage stand. Decon lift beam and crane hook. Dry all cask surfaces with clean rags as soon as practicable.
Decontaminate exposed cask surfaces as necessary including outside of skirt. Proceed to Section 5.4 for Preparation Of Cask For Departure.
Completed By: --------------
Date: --------------


===5.0 SQCIJ===
OP-4.3 Page 73*of 76 NOV 4  1983
SQC# ____ QC * -------*---------
~
OP-4.3 Page 55 of 76 NOV 4 7933 Procedure (continued)  
* 5.0   Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.59  Lower the crane auxiliary hook until the 2 legged sling cables are slack.
5.4.60  Remove the shackles from the shock absorbing cover and transfer the crane auxiliary hook and 2 legged sling to the other cover, and attach.
5.4.61  Repeat Steps 5.4.57.4 to 5.4.60 for the other shock absorbing cover.
5.4.62  Store the 2 legged sling, connecting shackles and hand tools and return the crane to the Fuel building. Close roll-up door and Decon building access hatch.
5.4.63  Replace the (6) trunnion impact limiters as follows:
                              - Ratchet 13/16 inch socket
                              - Torque wrench suitable for setting torques of 30 ft-lb
                              - Ratchet drive extension
  #1 #2 #3  #4 #5  #6 5.4.63.1    Manually position the trunnion impact limiter on its respective trunnion.
Note the trunnion impact limiter without gussets is to be installed on the downward facing (in relation to trailer) redundant trunnion (Figure 2).


===5.4 Preparation===
OP-4.3 Page 74 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure- (continued) 5.4   Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.63.2    Install the 9/16" bolt which attaches the limiter to hand tight.
5.4.63.3    Tighten the 9/16" bolt to a torque of 30 ft-lb.
5.4.64    Repeat Steps 5.4.63.1 thru 5.4.63.3 for the remaining impact limiters to be installed.
                  *5.4.65    Perform a cask and trailer contamination survey, recording the results on "Cask Transport Radiation        *,*1..
r.
Survey" and "Trailer Departure Radiation Survey" as applicable. Decontaminate as required to meet allowable levels for transport. Complete and retain the forms for documentation requirements.
NOTE:    DOT considers a contamination level significant, if when averaged over 300 square centimeters of any part of the package surface, it exceeds 10-4 &#xb5; 2
Ci/cm  (220 disintegrations per second per square 5      2 centimeter) for beta-gamma and 10- &#xb5; Ci/cm (22 disintegra~ions per second per square centimeter for alpha).  (49CFR 173.397).
5.4.66    Attach the required regulatory labels to the cask.


of Cask for Departure 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 Initial conditions are noted and satisfied.
OP-4.3 Page 75 of 76
Precautions and Limitations are noted. Verify that the port plug from opening "D" is removed. Remove water from bolt holes using an aspirator and install remaining lid bolts and tighten all lid bolts to the specified torque as follow: Required Equipment
                                                    -::"!,:.                      NOV 4  1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4  Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.67  Install the trailer protective enclosure as follows:
-torque wrench suitable for setting torques of 40 to 290 ft-lb 7/8" socket -drive extension 5.4.4.1 5.4.4.2 5.4.4.3 5.4.4.4 Install all bolts and tighten to hand tight. Tighten all bolts to 40 ft-lb in the following fashion: Tighten the bolts to 40 ft-lb following the numerical sequence as shown in Figure 25. Repeat the cycle of Step 5.4.4.3 starting with bolt number 1 until all bolts are torqued to 40 ft-lb .
5.4.67.1   Install any roller track sections, if they were removed to position the cask or cover onto the trailer.
5.0 ____ QC * * ~-------------------~-
5.4.67.2   Install the trailer protective enclosure by sliding the enclosure rearward by having one man on each side of the trailer grasp the side section of the tarpaulin and pull it towards the rear of the trailer.      Slide the enclosure until the tarpaulin is fully extended.
I OP-4.3 Page 56 of 76 -.. -*, NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
5.4.67.3   Release the back section of the tarpaulin by unbuckling the straps which fasten it to the tarpaulin roof section.
Allow it to unroll.
5.4.67.4   Fasten the rear tarpaulin section to the enclosure sides by buckling the straps along both sides of the rear tarpaulin section
* OP-4.3 Page 76 of 76 NOV 4  1983
~                                        ..,* -:/.~,.
                                                      ~-*...... ~,,
* 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4   Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.67.5    Tie-down the side tarpaulin walls of the protection enclosure by pulling the elastic tie-down rope over the trailer tie-down hooks.         Ensure that the rope is taut and firmly restraining the tarpaulin at all tie-down points.
Carefully check the ends of the tie-down rope to assure that they are properly tied and that the rope will not come loose.
5.4.67.6    Verify that all air vents of the protective enclosure are not obstructed (e.g. snow, etc.)
5.4.68  Verify that trailer placards read "Radioactive".
5.4.69  Complete and sign the "Cask Loading Report".
5.4.70  Provide all required shipping documents and a copy of the "Cask Loading Report" to the carrier.
5.4.71  Release the package for transport.
5.4.72  Return all tools and equipment to normal storage.
Completed By:
* Date:


===5.4 Preparation===
OP-4.3 ADDENDUM 1 Page 1 of 2 NOV 4  1983 1.0 Lid Gasket Tightness Testing
  -.~~*
2.0 Introduction This Addendum provides the procedure to be utilized for verifying the lid gasket tightness by subjecting the interspace between the inner and outer lid gaskets to a pressure rise test using the VDS installed throught the lid gasket pcirt and Connector "D" as shown on Figure 29, Attachment 1.
3.0 Lid Leakage Rate Test Procedure 3.1 Following torqueing of the lid bolts, remove residual water from lid gasket port opeining "D" with an aspirator.
3.2 Connect the VDS in the Lid Tightness Testing Mode as shown on Figure 29 with valves V-13, V-5 and V-7 closed.
3.3 Start the vacuum pump, with gas ballast valve open, open valve V-13 and begin vacuum drying of the lid gasket interspace by throttling valve V-6 to obtain a vacuum reading of approximately 15-20 mbar.
3.4 Continue vacuum drying operations until a vacuum of not less than 10 mbar is obtained as observed on vacuum gauge G-1.
3.5 When the specified vacuum is reached, close valves V-13 and V-6.
Record pressure as measured on gauge G-1 and the time on Form 6 "Cask Loading Leak Tightness Testing Data Sheet".
3.6 Observe the vacuum gauge G-1 for an increase in the test volume pressure for one minute.
3.7 At the end of the one minute, record the observed pressure from gauge G-1 and time on.the Forni. 6 data sheet.
3.8 Based upon the observed pressure rise (6 p) and the testing time, calculate the actual leakage rate" based upon teh formula below and record on the Form 6 data sheet.
3.9 L'    = 6P lid  60 (113.52)
                                      ~
2 L'lid  must be< 3.0 x 10-      ATM-CM3 SEC 6P must be MBAR


of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 NOTE: 5.4.4.5 *5.4.4.6 Tighten all lid bolts to the final required torque of 290 ft-lb by following the procedure in steps 5.4.4.3 and 5.4.4.4. Perform Lid Gasket Tightness Test per Addendum Ill. Remove the blind flanges. from openings "B" and "C", and thermocouple well port plugs "Fl", "F2" and "F3". Install thermocouples.
                                    *' ~ ... '*, ;"'\"()
Install the CDS in the Cask Draining Mode as shown on Figure 9. Drain the cask cavity water to the Decon Building sump until no more water comes out. Remove shield plug from "A". Connect the VDS to the cask cavity through shield plug opening "A" as shown on Figure 10, 12. Ensure valves V-2, V-3, V-4, V-5 and V-7 are closed and valve V-6 is open. Install drain bottle in Connector "C". To facilitate operations, it is recommended that a curve be plotted of cask internal pressure (mbar) versus pumping time during cask drying .
OP-4.3 .
5.0 * ** OP-4.3 Page 57 of 76 NOV 4 1983 '"J i Procedure (contitiued)
ADDENDUM 1 Page 2 of 2 NOV 4 1983
                                                              -2 3.10  If leakage rate is greater than 3.0 x 10              ATM-CC/SEC the test is unacceptable. Refer to the TN-81 shipping cask operating manual
  --.       for instructions on corrective action and retesting.
NOTE: Leakage Rate Calculation:
The following equation shall be the basis for the above lid leakage determination.
L' =  (A p) x (V)        ATM (At)          1013 mbar where t = acutal testing time, sec.
p = t.he observed pressure increase (decrease in vacuum) observed during the test mbar.
v = test volume, cm3 (115 cm)            3 L' = actual leakage rate (atm cm3 /s


===5.4 Preparation===
OP-4.3 ADDENDUM 2 Page 1 of 2
                                                          . r: '.f  NOV 4 1983 1.0 Cask Tightness Testing 2.0 Introduction This Addendum provides the procedure to be utilized for verifying the cask openings (Shield Plug "A", Blind Flange "B", and DRain Plug "C") are tested to insure that the leaktightness criteria for transport are met. The results of teh test are recorded on the Form 6 Data Sheet.
3.0 Cask Tightness Testing procedure.
3.1 Ensure the VDS is lined up in the evacuation mode as shown in Figure 11.
3.2 Open valves V-6 and V-2, check V-1, V-5 and V-7 closed.
3.3 Start the vacuum pump and evacuate the cask until a vacuum of 20-30 mbar is obtained as observed on G-1.
3.4 Close Valve V-6.
3.5 Wait approximately two minutes to allow the observed pressure on G-1 to stabilize.
3.6 Note the vacuum reading and the time.
a)  Vacuum                mbar b)  Time 3.7 After two minutes, note the following:
a)  Vacuum                mbar b)  Time 3.8 Calculate AP and AT from steps 3.6 and 3.7 above .


of Cask for Departure (continued)
OP-4.3
*5.4.9 NOTE: 5.4.10 Open valve V-2 and start the vacuum pump with the gas ballast valve open. Observe the cask cavity pressure using the gauge G-1 using valve V-6 to throttle the vacuum pump suction. The cask cavity pressure will normally show an initial steep pressure decrease until a pressure corresponding to the vapor pressure of the residual liquid in the cavity is reached. At this point, the cask cavity pressure will remain nearly constant showing a plateau region. This plateau will be observed to be at a pressure e~?al to the vapor pressure corresponding to the temperature of the cold wall of the cask cavity (anticipated pressure:
                              ; ~~~~ [.,: L..~.~ :., G .*~            ADDENDUM 2 Pag~ 2 of 2 l'JOV 4 1983 3.9  Actual Leakage Rate (L') Calculation - Based upon the increase in pressure, as observed on vacuum gauge G-1, over the minimum testing time (tmin) period, or during a longer time, the actual leakage rate (L') of the cask observed during teh tightness test is determined from the following equation:
14 mbar -35 mbar). When the vacuum reaches approximately 40 mbar, close valve V-6 and remove blind flange on "B" Connector (Fig. 14) to* break vacuum, forcing any water drain into the drain bottle. CAUTION: Be careful to retain "O" Ring when removing flange; vacuum could suck it in if not careful .
L'=ful      X  (V)  x        atm (t)                    1013 mbar where:    t = actual testing time in seconds Llp = the observed pressure change (decrease in vacuum) during the test in torr V  = testing volume in cm3 L' = actual leakage rate in atm cm3 /sec 3.10 Allowable Leakage Rate (L) - The allowable leakage rate (L) as calculated for a 30-day transport are based upon the calculations provided in the "Safety Analysis Report for TN-8 and TN-9 Packagings," Revision 7, dated September 8, 1976, Annex C to Chapter III, pages 313n through 13lt. The allowable leakage rate for a 30-day transport has been established as:
5.0 * * ---------*  
L = 9.2 x 10-lO atm cm3 /sec .
------------
3.11 If the test reveals that L'-< L, the test is acceptable. Record results on Form 6.
OP-4.3 Page 58 of 76 /, I -( NOV 4 1983 .** "'7 Procedure (continued)
3.12 If Cask Tightness Test is not acceptable (L' > L), refer to the TN-8L Shipping Cask Operating Manual for instructions or corrective action and retesting .
: 4. Rotate and Lift Cask I                                                          I I
I I.
: 3. Attach 1.ift Beum to II I        Casi<
II l )
                                                                                                      .,  I I
i r,"
: 1. Romove Shock
...__                    Absorbl ng Covers                                                                Slings t--:*
Shock Absorbing Cover                                r and Impact Limiters                                                                        .,*
(
L_-.
L.
      ----.:--Shock Absorbing Cover--)o--j*     ~        ~!'act        L~~~(                      r
                                                                                                    ~i
                                          +*~f-I **
                                                      --. 1*
: 2. Release cask                    *-H*+-
1* I J            ~,t-*-----
Tle-dow n r--r===i==,--,
                                                                                                    &#xb5;,
LJ
                                , - - t                t1'.--'    ---f.
Trailer Loading/Unloading Operations Figure / .


===5.4 Preparation===
Rear Shock Absorbing Front                                                                    Cover Shock                                  Lead-'-*--
Absorbing Cover                                                      C Front Cover                              Drum Lifting Lug(2)
A y
Fuel Compartment ( 3)
  **- -~'}--~.
j I M_-
Impact Limiter FJ    -~Trunnion J2
[
      .-        Lid
                            -Lid    I  Impact Limiter I
Lid          Rec~ss      (w/o Gussets)                              f L,ifting                                                                    .
                                                                                            'I Lug ( '1)                                                                    ;
CASK OVERVIEW Figure~
                        'I H


of .Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.11 5.4.12 NOTE: *5.4.13 5.4.14 Replace bind flange on "B" Connector, and open valve V-6 and continue pumping until the pressure is back down to approximately 40 mbar. Continue to repeat this step as long as a level increase is observed in the drain bottle. When no significant level increase in the drain bottle is noted, disconnect connnector "C" from the cask and continue vacuum pumping using valve V-6 to obtain a cavity pressure of approximately 20 mbar. Monitor the cask cavity internal pressure.
                                                                                                          .. -;~!-* *.J
As the last of the residual moisture is removed by the vacuum pump, the internal pressure as monitored on gauge G-1 will show a second steep pressure decrease.
                                                                                                              .       .*.{
Ensure the cask cavity pressure is not pumped below 7 mbar, which could cause freezing of the remaining water. Measure the temperature (T) of the cask cavity walls* using the thermocouples installed in wells "Fl", "F2" and "F3". Determine the water vapor pressure (P) in equilibrium with the coolest cavity wall temperature reading. Continue vacuum drying until a pressure of less than ~p (but not less than 7 mbar) is achieved) .
                                                          --------~                                      ,:,
OP-4.3 Page 59 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 ____ QC ____ QC
                                                                                                                  't.....
* Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued)  
                                                                                                                ... d Arm-Locking          ..*           *,i;
*5.4.15 *5.4.16 5.4.17 5.4.18 5.4.19 5.4.20 5.4.21 Isolate the vacuum pump from the cavity by closing valve V-6. Record initial pressure and time on test data sheet. (See Form 6) The cask cavity is considered dry if a rise in pressure does not exceed P/4 or 3.3 mbar, whichever is less, during a period of 10 minutes (record final pressure and time on test data sheet). See Form #6. If the pressure increase exceeds the above limits, open valve V-6 and start vacuum pump for further vacuum drying. Continue to repeat dryness verification until criteria of Step 5.4.16 are met. Upon successfui completion of the cask cavity dryness verification, disconnect the VDS by disconnecting connector "Al" from the Shield Plug opening "A". Reinstall shield plug "A" and torque bolts to 35 ft. -lbs. in a clockwise direction from the first bolt. Repeat the torquing of the bolts to 35 ft. -lbs. in a counter-clockwise direction.
:      I-~']
Readjust the VDS to place it in the Evacuation Mode as shown in Figure 11. 5.4.21.1 Perform Cask Tightness Test per Addendum 2 . .. ** 1 I 5.0 OP-4.3 Page 60 of 76 NOV 4 Procedure (continued)
Cylinder    ~-                     )
(End view)     *.
8'-2" Primary Beam Arm Drive Cylinder 6'-1" Seconda:
Beam Gulde
            -+Plate
!/I              I                                                                    \ \11 I" I                                                                            - f  -\+:
i
                                                                                                              ,)..
~ - - - - - - * - - - : , . : . , - - - - - - 2~
1   1
                                                        -------..,-------___.:J
                                                                                        *--J=:---.uir!
[g
                                                                                                        ~      1 w          'W t-'IGURF! 5 T,i f t Ri:tnm 1\c11:1nmh1"


===5.4 Preparation===
            ;-:-:,~ ~ C' -* *-.-. *-
f!'-~e/-lT Z
                                            . _::..,..:..i  *.:*.:..
                                                                                            ~Abt.,    ,:1r NOV 4      1983 Locking Cylinder
( 2)
Actuating Cylinder
{ 2)
BypassJ Valve (2)                                                            lh;---~              .)l To Redundant Beam (as required)
                                                                      ~-----------
* Pressure Gauge
                                      ~\. Locked Arms Open Lever
                                                          ~Unlocke (Green)
Arms Closed Air                        qp    (Black)
Controller                      [j              Air Box                              Cutoff Reset                                  --
1_
Plant Air Supply
*~ Schematic of Lift Beam Pneumatic Actuating System Figure              4-


of Cask for Departure (continued)
fnT~z IA:6~ S' NOV 4 1983 To Gaseous G-1 v-1rI 0    .
*5.4.22 5.4.23 5.4.24 5.4.25 5.4.26 5.4.27 Adjust the cask cavity internal pressure to 0.3 bars, absolute (-10 psig) using valve V-3 (not connected to the gaseous radwaste discharge line) as a vent to atmospheric pressure and by the operation of the vacuum pump (valve V-6 must be open during vacuum pump operation).
Samole Cylinder                                          ,_
Record the final pressure on the "Cask Loading Report". Remove the VDS including Connector "B". Remove the tape and plugs from the cask front face bolt holes. Check external contamination of all exposed surfaces of the cask and decontaminate as required.
Radwaste Discharge
Survey the recesses for openings "B" and "C". Remove thermocouples and replace well port plugs "Fl", "F2" and "F3", port plug "D" and the blind flanges for openings "B" and "C", and tighten all bolts and plugs to the specified torque per the following instructions:
                                                                                  ~
5.4.27.1 Thermocouple well port plugs "Fl", "F2" and "F3" and port plug "D". One torque wrench equipped with a 1-3/8" socket, suitable for setting torques of 35 ft-lb is required.
0-,: / :K:-V-3                         _                                        I r
1983 ITIALS 5.0 ____ QC ____ QC
v-2,..
* OP-4.3 Page 61 of 76 NOV 4 Procedure (continued)
1              .,,..-,,- 2 .i n
* Blank I
I I.,,ti:
I                \
I I
I
        'O I .
      '!-,                                                                      I I
I I                                                                      I I                                      I                            *1 I
I                    I                I ;2    in. Blank              I I                    I I
I I
I I/                  G-3 I    Cask            I                  1                              I I
I                    I I                    I                                                I Filter        V-7 I                                                                      I I                                                                    .L I
v-s /
I I                    I                          KF-lOT Vac Pum  Skid VDS in Sampling Mode Figure,


===5.4 Preparation===
NOV 4 1983 v1-t l V-9    ,.;
r----------_.,4.-.JL.-..~J- - - . . .        \
v-rz..  '\
Connector "A2"                        I I
0                                            I I
I I
I 1
To I      I                                Liquid I      I
'-'  I    .,                                  Radwaste Drain/System I      I I      I I
I      I        cask I      I I      I I
I CDS in cask Filling/Cooldown Mode Figure f,


of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.28 NOTE: 5.4.27.2 5.4.27.3 5.4.27.4 5.4.27.5 Install plug to hand tight, then torque to 35 ft-lb. Bolts for the blind flanges of openings "B", and "C". One torque wrench equipped with a 3/8" -hex set screw socket, suitable for setting torques of 35 ft-lb is required.
t1!TT~-tlA't6N1 :z Mot: 1 NOV 4     1983
Install the three boh: :,. for each flange f .. i and torque the bolts to 35 ft-lb in a clockwise direction from the first bolt. Repeat the torquing of the bolts to 35 ft-lb in a counter clockwise direction.
-~
Remove the protective skirt as follows: Do not remove the skirt until all required external cask decontamination operations are complete.
Connector "B" I        I I
Removal of the skirt prior to the completion of these steps risks contamination of the cask fins. 5.4.28.l 5.4.28.2 Remove connectors "Jl" and "J2". Remove any remaining tape from the upper and lower skirt edges and unwrap the tensioning cables, freeing the skirt from the drum grooves
I I        I I        I I        I I        I I        I Cask I        I I        I I        I I        I I
* 1983 5.0
I Connector "C II a:L-,,-.J,, ___
* OP-4.3 Page 62 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
                                                    .-- --  '\
                                                                \
                                                              ~
To
                                                        . Liquid Radwaste Drain CDS    in Cask Draining Mode Figure 9


===5.4 Preparation===
I\Tr~,'IIIC/JT  I PAbc Y NOV 4    1983 To V-2                                                          Gaseous Radwaste Connector "B"                                        Discharge "Al"
                                  \
0 I
I
                ,-J
        -I    I I
I I    I I    I-I    I I    I I    I
..._,        I I
I    I I    I                                        V-6            I I                                                        I I                                    Filter        v-7 I                                                              I I                                              V ac P ump
                                                                    .L I
onnector "C"        V-5 Drain Bottle Vac Pump Skid VDS in Vacuum Drying Mode Figure IC
                                                                                  \ '


of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.29 5.4.30 5.4.31 5.4.28.3 5.4.28.4 5.4.28.5 5.4.28.6 Remove the 13 screws from the upper and lower skirtbars. (Note: Remove the bolts from bottom to top). Check that both the upper and lower lateral guides are free of the drum grooves. Remove the skirt from the cask using the skirt handles (Fig. 20) (5). Hang skirt on storage ring. Check the skirt contamination level. Decontaminate if necessary until acceptable levels are attained.
To NOV 4 1983 Gaseous Radwaste v-11
Normally, washing the skirt with clean water and a soft cloth is sufficient to decontaminate the skirt. Survey the cask/skirt joints now exposed and the finned surfaces of the cask for contamination and decontamina_te as required.
    ~G-1 0  Samole Cylinder Discharge 4
Reinstall flanges "Jl" and "J2" and torque 3/8" hex head bolts to 35 ft-lb. Transfer cask crane to a position above the cask and lower lift beam. Grease the surfaces of the lift beam arms, outer front trunnion shoulders and rear trunnion inner shoulders with Never-Seeze.
I (d-,4,Kr v-3                                               l v-2!
ITIALS 5.0 OP-4.3 Page 63'of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
1                              Vacuum Hose I
I I
I I
I I
I I
                                  -                          I I
I
....         I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I        I                                        I Cask I        I I        I                  i--~--~~V-6         I I        I I
I        I I                                        Vac Pum I
I I        I                    KF-lOT  .             .
* Q'.' L -I I      ,-.J
                ,"---;()
                    -      VDS In Evacuation Mode
.--                              Figure //


===5.4 Preparation===
rt"l'"Tt\Crvt\'t).f'c ..I PAbE' 10 .
NQV 4     1983 KF 50 Vacuum
                          -- ------    Flange 2" SS Pipe Groove Connector "A-1" Figure t"Z..-


of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.32 5.4.33 5.4.34 5.4.35 Re-engage lift beam arms (see 5.3.3) and lift the cask off the decontamination pad and remove the Bottom Protective Cover per the following instructions:
A~Z
5.4.32.1 5.4.32.2 5.4.32.3 5.4.32.4 Disconnect the bottom cover attachment cables from the cask trunnions and fold them to the side of the cover so they are not in the way. Slowly lift the cask off the decontamination pad. As the cask is lifted, remove the bottom cover from the cask. Decon the cask bottom surface. Check the bottom cover for contamination.
* l1cbE II NOV 4 1983
Decontaminate as needed. Transfer the cover to its storage area. Remove tape from alignment pin and bolt holes and survey for removable contamination and decontaminate the rear cask face as required.
                      .'~ "'o;,
Transfer the cask to a position over the rear trunnion supports of the tilting frame. Grease rear trunnion supports with Never-Seeze grease.
                          , /~'7:?n 2" NPT
5.0
                .,I I
* OP-4.3 Page 64 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
I 2" ss L._O-Ringl Groove Connector "A-2"      .... - ..
-*,.E, 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.36 NOTE: 5.4.37 Lower the cask bottom trunnions onto the tilting frame rear trunnion supports.
Figure I':]
Cask should be oriented such that drain "C" will face upward, after cask is tilted into a horizontal position.
Carefully rotate cask to horizontal position.
CAUTION: Maintain crane and crane cables in a vertical 5~4.38 5.4.39 5.4.40 position over lifting trunnions while performing tilting of cask. Disengage the lifting beam from the cask and return it to its storage stand in the Fuel Building.
Perform contamination survey required by H.P. on cask surfaces inaccessible after shock absorbing cover and impact limiter installation.
After releasing lift beam from cask crane main hook, position main hook over horizontal lifting beam
* 5.0
* OP-4.3 Page 65 of 76 NOV 4 Procedure (continued)


===5.4 Preparation===
                                                                    ,l/~ME"JJT      .Z:.
PkbG:" 1z. ** * -
                                      < \.::;                        NOV 4    1983 KF 50 Vacuum Flange
                        .....;...-_-i=__
_I~- -        KF 50 Vacuum Flange
*                            '1-:-:::ii...----
3/4" SS Pipe t---
I 11------..
        \.------11    I  I I IL-----'
I
:tn 1
I    I  l I rt-1~.,
View A-A 2.5" O.D.
Tubing        J_-:.._-_-=_--:.,
                    'r-- __ ,.
                    ., ____ .1,                  Hansen C. --- -::.  ~.:r            coupling Socket Connector "B"                                              \.
Figure / 4-'


of Cask for Departure (continued).
NOV 4 1983 Hansen Couplir.g Socket
5.4.41 5.4.42 5.4.43 5.4.44 Lower main hook between the yoke plated, insert the pin, and lock the pin in place with the keeper plate. Return truck and trailer to the loading/unloading position as indicated by reference mark established in Step 5.1.8 -"Unloading Cask From Truck". Raise the horizontal lift beam clear of its supports and rotate it on the hook swivel so that the front end (short pendants) is oriented toward the front of the cask. Raise high enought for the trunnion plates to clear the cask. Traverse the beam directly over the ~ask. Grease the bearing surfaces of the lifting pendants and the lifting trunnions of the cask with Never-Seeze.
:    "l 3/4" ss Pipe
Lower the beam slowly and guide the trunnion plates past the trunnions until they can be slipped on. Raise the locking bars, slip the plates over the trunnions and release the locking bars so that they rest on the trunnions inside the trunnion lip thus preventing the plates from coming off . 1983 5.0 * .... ~:. ' -/ OP-4.3 Page 66 NOV 4 *-* .... ,. Procedure (continued)
                                    ~
*, ! .. 5.4 d .. Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.45 5.4.46 5;4.47 5.4.48 5.4.49 5.4.50 The cask should be raised carefully until it is clear above the supports.
A~
The front will rise about 8 inches before the rear trunnions lift off their supports.
      ,r,- i-t I                  )
If, at this time, it appears necessary to control lateral movement of the cask, ropes should be attached at the trunnions and held on the ground. The cask shall be raised high enough to clear its supports on the trailer and rotated 90&deg; to align with trailer. Raise cask to an elevation sufficient to clear the tarpaulin rails and position over trailer. The cask is lowered onto the trailer. Slight traversing of the crane may be required to center the rear trunnions within~ inch in their supports.
I    I ~
Once the rear trunnions are in contact the cask can be fully lowered. With the pendants slack, the locking bars can be raised and the trunnion plates removed :rom the trunnions.
      ;"--+-   -t-'
Raise the horizontal lift beam and traverse to the storage* supports.
I  I A...._j I
Lower the horizontal lift beam onto the supports.
I                    View A-A
Disengage the hook pin, raise the hook, store the pin . of 76 1983 ITIALS 5.0
* I r
* OP-4.3 Page 67 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
2.5" O.D. Tubing Hansen coupling Socket Connector "C"
* Figure  l&


===5.4 Preparation===
f~>~r;.
          ~ ....... ~ Ri:}'"?gE:'.~i: ~,  r'~i-7-~*
NOV 4 1983
                                                          ~Connection
                                      ~--~-~~                  for 2" I.D.
Hose i .
**                                  _________...__      1
                                                          / 2 " NPT
      \
        \__O-Ring_ Groove                                          .... -
Connector "J" Figure :f7                        1_
*~


of Cask for Departure 5.4.51 5.4.52 5.4.53 NOTE: Position the cask crane to facilitate the installation of the shock absorbing covers. Perform rear trunnion, front trunnion and trunnion guide assembly tie-down operations per the following instructions:
C*                      Section AA
Required Equipment
(  *                                                  (
-Ratchet -3/4 inch socket (front trunnion guide assembly bolts) -13/16 inch socket -Torque wrench (suitable for setting torques of 30 and 125 ft-lbs) 1/8 open end wrench -Ratchet drive extension Install the rear trunnion tie-down as follows: Rear Trunnions 5.4.53.1 5.4.53.2 Place the trunnion tie-down collars over . the rear trunnions.
n--11-l
Install the two 3/4 inch bolts (with their lock washers) to hand tight. Ensure that the bolt threads contain an acceptable grease coating. Ensure that the bolt lock washers are installed .
    -=t-'
ITIALS 5.0 *
I  -I ~ I I                  h-i-l.,..-Cask Bottom Trunnlons~t-\
* OP-4.3 Page 68 *of 76 Nov 4 1983 Procedure (continued)  
i;~*-,,                                ,, +--,.-
ti--~-                                   r-~--J
                              ~===::..1====!:*~-:<--- Elastic Straps
                                                                                  ,* *. . f.,/ "
ti:Z, _;::; ~
Trunnion Position Cut-out to                              End View Colnslde with Connector "C"
                                                                                                  ""'l,-.,
ii">,.-** '
                                                                                                  ~
                                                                                                  ~-'**y
                /
0 I
I n-      j rr1                                              -~
ll-r A
I
(
                                            )0 I
0(, '
1
                  -~-*-~--                                                                                  w
                                                                                                              ~ ~ ~
: ~f~
                                                                                                                ~
I t*
Q)
B I
t B
Bottom Protective Cover w
                                                                                                                    ~t Figure l r-


===5.4 Preparation===
Anr-PtWlEJJT"    ~
                    ~~~.*r
                        ....' . '\
                                  .                                       fAbe    1,
                      *      *~                                            NOV 4   1983 Tape----
Lateral Guide
{tygon tubing)
Cable Tensioner_,..,.._                                                Seal of Skirt Ends Detail 1 G)
Handle-~*i=::::J1 Cable (2 loops) 0                                                Top and Bottom
                                          ,~
                                                                                            \ .
*~                              Protective* Skirt Installation Figure c..D


of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.54 5.4.53.3 Install the rear trunnion support bolts and tighten each to a torque of 125 ft-lb. Repeat for second rear trunnion.
e                                              Section A*A (enlarged)
Front Trunnions 5.4.54.1 5.4.54.2 5.4.54.3 5.4.54.4 Swing the binder assembly over the cask trunnion.
C : : : -;j',,
Verify that the collar is correctly positioned on the trunnion inside shoulder.
            .     I  '* I
The position of the collar should be such that it restrains the top half of the trunnion shoulder.
                        ~
If necessary, adjust the collar position, by performing Step 5.4.56. With the binder handle in the up position, engage the binder attachment hook under the trunnion tie-down support lip .* Push the binder handle down to the full down position.
Pressure
Verify that the collar I is tight against the cask trunnion.
* 1, I  2 b -      q~i;;-=;t=      I *"I i Smooth 1 1 1 c *.
If it is not, adjust the tie-down assembly by performing Step 5.4.56
                                                                          \Rough Surface Surface
* NITIALS 5.0
* 1 ~ ,;
* OP-4.3 Page 69 of 76 NDV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
Welded                          ,  Lateral Gulde                                                '**
Area                            Tubing, -200" Top and Bollom
                            -  -~--.,,,,
1, 11 (i'
t
                                          ,,I',
11 I
N
--                                        ,,,II:                                                                      ,r'..
II,,
                                          ,,,,              13'      Section B-B 11 II                                                                    (
I' ti c.-_- -
              -_-.:.: : . ":..- . --- ::, I II II Protective  .       Plastic Skirt Figure ~I
                                                                                                                              \--\
* I I
Cable Tensioner ( 7)
Protective (Plastic)
IL,(..+41......__  Skirt
                                                                                                        ~*-o, ***
Cask                                                                                                f't/
                                                                                                    ~        ,j Lateral!                                                                                    "'
f      ,f Guide r
(*
it      .i
(
Closure Bars for Protective Skirt Figure 2.~                                                              z 0
                                                                                                                  ~
                                                                                                                  ~
00 w
                                                                                                                    !it
                                                                                                                      '\
H
                            ''                        . a,....11.ec*


===5.4 Preparation===
(
Rotation. Drum II oles ( 15) b''*,/'
                                                                              ,.,*.. **: ~
i\ . ~!
(.*.: ?;
Locking l17)
Handle 7              '  *' c~
Cable*
Tensioning
_/Nut (19)
Cable Securing+                      11 0" Ring Screw                      for Spring+-
(16)                            Tenslon (18)
B~C-k,_',
Section A*A                        Section B*B                  Section C*C Skirt Cable Tensioner
              .'            Figute 23'


of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.55 NOTE: 5.4.56 5.4.54.5 5.4.54.6 Lock the binder in its down position by securing the binder handle restraint chain in the trailer chain securing hook. Repeat Steps 5.4.54.1 through 5.4.54.5 for the second front trunnion.
Section AA                            ltrf~ENTZ PAGE zo NOV 4  1983
Trunnion Guide Assembly Installation 5.4.55.1 5.4.55.2 5.4.55.3 Swing back the trailer front cradle dust cover plate. Install the trunnion guide assembly around the cask bottom trunnion.
(
Install the two~" bolts with their lock washers. Grease the bolt threads as needed prior to installation.
G)upper Bar See Detail 1
5.4.55.4 Torque the two~" boits to a torque of 30 ft-lbs. Front Trunnion Tie-Down Adjustment (N/A if not necessary) 5.4.56.1 Using two* 1-!i;" open end wrenches, adjust the lock nuts which secure the collar to the 3/4" tie-down rod. These nuts should be turned to raise or lower the collar as needed.
(?'i Lower Bar Cable Tensioner      ~ee Detail 2
ITIALS 5.0 OP-4.3 Page 70 of 76 NOV 4 . 1983 Procedure (continued)
:-=:i,-H,-- - - -   =.3-Lateral Guide i-          I I
                                                        ,---r-= _j
                                                            . r A          I                                                        A I
I I
I I
I I      I I -    I Detail 1                                      I      I L--'-=-L __
I_
Protective Skirt Assembly Figure Z4


===5.4 Preparation===
NOV 4 1983 3
------------ + - - - - - ~ - -
14 (a) Lid
--+-------+--------t--
(b) Shock Absorbing Covers
                                                  \ .
Lid and Cover Bolt Tightening Sequence Figure  z.i,


of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.57 5.4.56.2 5.4.56.3 Position the tie-down assembly over the trunnion and verify that the adjustment is correct. Tighten lock nuts (upper and lower) tight against the collar and each other to ensure that they do not loosen. Replace the shock absorbing covers per the following instructions.
                                                                                                            --- -~----:=:___ Afr~c;,,..~_r-:--\
The weight of each cover is approximately 879 lb. Required Equipment
                                    ,~-(-';]                                                                      * .: . .: e'\-6e_u--: --- ----
-2 legged sling equipped with connections to allow attachment to the lifting crane hook (bale) and to the cover connecting shackles (loops, etc.). -2 connecting shackles -Ratchet -Ratchet drive extension  7/8 inch socket Torque wrench suitable for setting torques of 40 and 290 ft-lbs. -ton chain fall with dynamometer 5.4.57.1 Attach the 2 legged sling to the 2 lifting lugs of the shock absorbing cover by means of the 2 connecting shackles.
                                    '-<;/
5.0
                                    ,_;;                                                                                                1983
* OP-4.3 Page 71 of 76 NOV 4 Procedure (continued)
                                  --J
                                -J
                              )
                        -~-.1*
                  \I_,                                                                          ...._
                  }'
              }'
J CA~I(. Ul,,)f..OAOl,...,Q.
AR&#xa3; A (                S/-IR(.LC c.J) s N
                                                                          -Ir
_J._
i
                                                                                      /
                                                                *---... t:=:::r-7,,'
l.1l"'T1... G-      T-'-)~..::1,0..:1$              ---J::~--
U:.6e-I
                                                                          *j
                                                                                                                                            \ .
A.
t FuL 7?01..t... Vf    L)l>O F&deg;I(;,~      Z..Co


===5.4 Preparation===
PAI:>&#xa3;  2.-3
                  *.?
j                                    NOV 4 1983
              ..)
.._.  . }
          .J
      ,/
tJ w "'---~-- 1=
v'S.e L. 11, />.*.c ,=c!l&#xa3;NCf:
m1111,/t.. re IIV/Jt=J        !AS/<. *S Ct+Vlif i*
l        -*
_1_
                                                                \ .


of Cask for Departure (continued)
er  4,3
NOTE: 5.4.57.2 5.4.57.3 5.4.57.4 5.4.57.5 Center the crane auxiliary hook directly over the shock absorbing cover to be handled. There.is no preference in the shock absorbing cover installation sequence; either may be installed first. Lower the crane auxiliary hook. Attach chain fall and dynamometer assembly to auxiliary hook. Attach the 2 legged sling lifting bale to the dynamometer.
                                              '                          f'rTT~~T f p~~ ?A--
Slowly raise the crane auxiliary hook until the sling legs are taut. Transfer the shock absorbing cover to its respective end of the cask. The shock absorbing covers are~ interchangeable.
NOV 4 1983 To Gaseous Radwaste Discharge
5.4.57.6 Lower the shock absorbing cover such that its centering pins are in alignment with the cask alignment pin holes. Use chain fall for fine adjustments during alignment
        .~
* 1983 ITIALS 5.0 .-* OP-4.3 Page 72 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
_*.)~
A
  '*;,f/
Pirani Gage Head Connector "D" 0
* V-6 Filter cask                                     V-7 Vac  .l..
Pump          ,
V-5 Vac Pumo Skid VDS in Lid Tightness Testing Mode Figure 2CJ 148


===5.4 Preparation===
OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT II Page 1 of 3
::~\::/                                                                          NOV 4 1983
            ,. . . ~<?            FORM 6 "CASK LOADING LEADAGE RATE TESTING DATA SHEET"
            ** ; . J 1.0 Lid Gaskets Leakage Rate Testing - See Addendum 1.
Initial pressure:
..  *~
:-:,";]
1.1
                                                        --------mbar Time:
Final pressure:
1.2
                                                    ---------mbar Time:
1.3  Test !:,.P:
                                              ------------mbar Test !:,.t:
                                              ------------seconds 1.4  Calculated leak rate:
11 Lid =                       cm3 /sec
                                              --------atm 1.5   Verify caluclated leadage rate is less than
                                    . x 1--2 atm cm3/ sec and test is acceptable:
3.0
* 2.0 Cavity Drying and Dryness Verification 2 .1  Vacuum Drying Operations 2 .1.1      Time:
                                                    --------at        start of vacuum drying operations 2 .1. 2      Minimum cold wall temperature (t) as measured by thermocouple "Fl", "F2" or "F3":
Location:
Temperature:
                                                            ------&deg;F 2.1. 3      Water vapor pressure (P) in equilibrium with cold wall temperature, (t):
Vapor pressure:
                                                              --------mbar 2.2  Cavity Dryness Verification 2.2.1        Cavity pressure at beginning of dryness verification:
* Pressure:
Time:
                                                        --------mbar


of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.58 5.4.57.7 Install ~he cover by slowly moving the cover toward the cask face. Care should be taken to ensure that the alignment pin holes are aligned correctly and the covers remain vertical during installation.
OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT II Page 2 of 3
It is recommended that a dynamometer be used to ensure that excessive force is not applied to the bolts. Install the four shock absorbing cover bolts and torque them as follows: 5.4.58.1 5.4.58.2 5.4.58.3 Install all cover bolts and tighten to hand tight. Tighten all bolts to 40 ft-lb. in the following fashion. (a) Following the numerical sequence shown in Figure (b), tighten the bolts to 40 ft-lb. (b) Repeat the cycle until all bolts are torqued to 40 ft-lb. Tighten all cover bolts to the final required torque to 290 ft-lb by following the procedure in 5.4.58.2 (a) and (b).
* 2.0 Cavity Drying and Dryness Verification (continued)                 NOV 4 1983 2.2  Cavity Dryness Verification (continued) 2.2.2    Cavity pressure at end of dryness verification:
* 5.0 OP-4.3 Page 73*of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure (continued)
Pressure:                mbar Time:
2.2.3    Verify cavity gas pressure rise is no greater then P/4 or 3.3 mbar, whichever is less:
fl p:
                            --------mbar fl t:
Test is acceptable:
3.0 Cask Opening Tightness Testing - See Addendum 2.
3.1  Blind Flange "B" Test 3 .1.1  Initial pressure:                  mbar
* 3 .1. 2 Time:
Final pressure:
Time:
mbar 3.1.3   Test flP:
Test flt:
3.1.4    Calculated leak rate:
3/
L'"B" =                  atm cm    sec 3.2  "C" Hansen Coupling Plug Test 3.2.1    Initial pressure:                  mbar Time:
3*. 2 .2 Final pressure:                    mbar Time:
3.2.3   '!'est flP:              mbar
* Test flt:                seconds


===5.4 Preparation===
i~,...
      ;,..  ' ,.-:--** ............                                              OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT II Page 3 of 3
*- 3.0      Cask Opening Tightness Testing (continued)                                NOV 4  1983
: 3. 2 *
* 11 C11 Hansen* coupling Pl*ug Test (continued}
3.2.4          Calculated leak rate:
3 L'
                                              "C" -- - - - - - - - -atm cm /sec 3.3            Shield Plug "A" Test 3.3.1          Initial pressure:
                                                                --------mbar Time:
3.3.2          Final pressure:                    mbar Time:
3.3.3          Test AP:
                                                      --------mbar Test At:
: r.            --------seconds 3.3.4          Calculated leak rate:
L'                              3 "A" -- - - - - - - - -atm cm /sec 4.0      Total ACutal Leakage Rate 4.1            L'        = L'Lid  + L'"B" + L'ncn + L'"A" L' =
: 4. 2            Test is acceptable if:
L'        < 9.2 x 10- 2 atm cm3 /sec 4.3            Enter total leakage rate calculate~ above on the Cask Loading Report.
Test is acceptable:
QC:
DATE:


of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.59 5.4.60 5.4.61 5.4.62 5.4.63 Lower the crane auxiliary hook until the 2 legged sling cables are slack. Remove the shackles from the shock absorbing cover and transfer the crane auxiliary hook and 2 legged sling to the other cover, and attach. Repeat Steps 5.4.57.4 to 5.4.60 for the other shock absorbing cover. Store the 2 legged sling, connecting shackles and hand tools and return the crane to the Fuel building.
I
Close roll-up door and Decon building access hatch. Replace the (6) trunnion impact limiters as follows: -Ratchet 13/16 inch socket -Torque wrench suitable for setting torques of 30 ft-lb -Ratchet drive extension
.~,-,
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 5.4.63.1 Manually position the trunnion impact limiter on its respective trunnion.
OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 1 of 5
Note the trunnion impact limiter without gussets is to be installed on the downward facing (in relation to trailer) redundant trunnion (Figure 2).
                              *-    '-~ *~, ... - -.. ..,..,.1
ITIALS 5.0
                                                                .I , ;                        N.OV 4 1983 CASK DEPARTURE FORMS
* OP-4.3 Page 74 of 76 NOV 4 1983 Procedure-(continued)


===5.4 Preparation===
OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 2 of 5 NOV 4
* 1983 "SHIPPER"S CERTIFICATION FOR RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS" Transport No.
Consigned to:
Place of Departure:
Destination:
Shipper:
Proper Shipping Name: Radioactive Material, Fissile, N.O.S.
Number of Packages:      One (1)
* Material Quantity:
Acitivity of Package:
                          ----------------------curies Packaging Identification:      USA/9015/B( )F Material Class:      Radioactive Material Name of Radionuclides: Mixed Fission Products Transport Group to which material belongs:      II Category Label Applied:    Radioactive Yellow II Transport Index:
Fissile Class of Package:      Fissile Class III NOTE: Warning - Fissile Calss III Shipment. Do not load more than one package per vehicle. In loading the storage areas, keep at least 20 feet (6 meters) from other packages, bearing radioactive labels .


of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.64 *5.4.65 NOTE: 5.4.66 5.4.63.2 5.4.63.3 Install the 9/16" bolt which attaches the limiter to hand tight. Tighten the 9/16" bolt to a torque of 30 ft-lb. Repeat Steps 5.4.63.1 thru 5.4.63.3 for the remaining impact limiters to be installed.
-***--.-.----**- **--*--*-*------* *-*--*-----*----*: __________...,.* -**** . -. *.* .. ---~-------*-*--*-----
Perform a cask and trailer contamination survey, recording the results on "Cask Transport Radiation Survey" and "Trailer Departure Radiation Survey" as applicable.
OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 3 of 5 NOV 4 1983 Description of the physical and chemical form of the material:
Decontaminate as required to meet allowable levels for transport.
Irradiated        Fuel  Assemblies-*:
Complete and retain the forms for documentation requirements.
Highest dose at the external surface of the package:
DOT considers a contamination level significant, if when averaged over 300 square centimeters of any -4 part of the package surface, it exceeds 10 &#xb5; Ci/cm 2 (220 disintegrations per second per square centimeter) for beta-gamma and 10-5&#xb5; Ci/cm 2 (22 disintegra~ions per second per square centimeter for alpha). (49CFR 173.397).
                        ----------mrem/h Highest dose rate at one (1) meter from the surface:
Attach the required regulatory labels to the cask. *,*1.. r.
                                                                                                      -------mrem/h Highest dose rate at two (2) meters from surcace of trailer:
ITIALS
                        ----------mrem/h Maximum level of non-fixed contamination of package and trailer:
* OP-4.3 Page 75 of 76 -::"!,:. NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued)
4      2 Beta, gamma:                                                10   Ci/ cm )
                                                      ------------( <
Alpha                                                          5       2 10  Ci/ cm )
                                                      ------------( <                                                          f:.
* This is to certify that the above named materials are properly classified, described, packaged, marked and labeled, and are in proper condition for transportation according to the applicable regulations of the Department of Transportation.
Shipper's Representative:
                                                                    -----------------------(Signature)
Date and hour of departure:
Name(s) of driver(s):
Vehicle Identification Number:
Date and hour of arrival:
Receiver's Signature:


===5.4 Preparation===
:~ ' . . -* '      .. -, -*., -.y                                            OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 4 of 5 NOV 4  1983 CASK TRANSPORT RADIAITON SURVEY FORM SITE                                SURVEYED BY:                    DEPARTURE DATE/TIME CASK SERIAL NO:                      INSTRUMENT:                    SURVEY DATE:
PT      Contamination Survey Points                    dpm/100 1      Front Face - left 2      Front FAce - right 3    Lid Surface 4     Front Drum surface - left side 5      Front Drum surface - bottom 6      Front Drum surface - right side 7      Front Drum surface - top 8      Left Trunnion/Impact Limiter 9      Right Trunnion/Impact Limiter 10      Bottom Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter 11      Top Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter 12      Fins - bottom front 13      Fins - top front 14      Fins - right side front 15      Fins - left side front 16      Fins - bottom rear 17      Fins - top rear 18      Fins - right side rear 19      Fins - left side rear 20      Left Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter 21      Right Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter 22      Rear Drum surface - left side 23      Rear Drum surface - right side 24      Rear Drum surface - bottom 25      Rear Drum surface - top 26      Rear Drum base surface - center 27      Rear Drum base surface - left 28      Rear Drum base surface - right 29      Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) 30      Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside) 31      Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) 32      Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside)
Radiation Levels (mrem/h)
At Contact            3' From Surface      6' From Surface PT a
b C
d                        --
                      ' e f
g h


of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.67 Install the trailer protective enclosure as follows: 5.4.67.1 5.4.67.2 5.4.67.3 5.4.67.4 Install any roller track sections, if they were removed to position the cask or cover onto the trailer. Install the trailer protective enclosure by sliding the enclosure rearward by having one man on each side of the trailer grasp the side section of the tarpaulin and pull it towards the rear of the trailer. Slide the enclosure until the tarpaulin is fully extended.
OP-4.3 .
Release the back section of the tarpaulin by unbuckling the straps which fasten it to the tarpaulin roof section. Allow it to unroll. Fasten the rear tarpaulin section to the enclosure sides by buckling the straps along both sides of the rear tarpaulin section *
ATTACHMENT III Page 5 of 5 NOV 4 1983 TRAILER DEPARTURE RADIATION SURVEY FORM SURVEYED BY:                  DEPARTURE DATE TIME:
* 5.0
VEHICLE NO. :                   INSTRUMENT:                    SURVEY DATE/TIME:
* OP-4.3 Page 76 of 76 NOV 4 1983 . .,* -:/.~,. Procedure (continued)
FIXED    REMOVABLE LOCATION                  mrem/hr    dpm/100 1 Cask Drum Support 2 Tarpaulin Support 3 Rear Deck Plate 4 Rear Deck Plate 5 Trunnion Support - Front                    '
~-* ...... ~,, 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.68 5.4.69 5.4.70 5.4.71 5.4.72 5.4.67.5 5.4.67.6 Tie-down the side tarpaulin walls of the protection enclosure by pulling the elastic tie-down rope over the trailer tie-down hooks. Ensure that the rope is taut and firmly restraining the tarpaulin at all tie-down points. Carefully check the ends of the tie-down rope to assure that they are properly tied and that the rope will not come loose. Verify that all air vents of the protective enclosure are not obstructed (e.g. snow, etc.) Verify that trailer placards read "Radioactive".
6 Trunnion Support - Front 7 Trunnion Support - Back 8 Trunnion Support - Back 9 Tarpaulin 10 Trailer Beam 11 Trailer Beam 12 Front Deck Plate 13 Front Deck Plate 14 Front Deck Plate I 15 Tire Surface
Complete and sign the "Cask Loading Report". Provide all required shipping documents and a copy of the "Cask Loading Report" to the carrier. Release the package for transport.
Return all tools and equipment to normal storage. Completed By: ----------------
Date: ----------------
* -.~~*
* 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 ---" --**--------OP-4.3 ADDENDUM 1 Page 1 of 2 Lid Gasket Tightness Testing Introduction NOV 4 1983 This Addendum provides the procedure to be utilized for verifying the lid gasket tightness by subjecting the interspace between the inner and outer lid gaskets to a pressure rise test using the VDS installed throught the lid gasket pcirt and Connector "D" as shown on Figure 29, Attachment
: 1. Lid Leakage Rate Test Procedure Following torqueing of the lid bolts, remove residual water from lid gasket port opeining "D" with an aspirator.
Connect the VDS in the Lid Tightness Testing Mode as shown on Figure 29 with valves V-13, V-5 and V-7 closed. Start the vacuum pump, with gas ballast valve open, open valve V-13 and begin vacuum drying of the lid gasket interspace by throttling valve V-6 to obtain a vacuum reading of approximately 15-20 mbar. Continue vacuum drying operations until a vacuum of not less than 10 mbar is obtained as observed on vacuum gauge G-1. When the specified vacuum is reached, close valves V-13 and V-6. Record pressure as measured on gauge G-1 and the time on Form 6 "Cask Loading Leak Tightness Testing Data Sheet". Observe the vacuum gauge G-1 for an increase in the test volume pressure for one minute. At the end of the one minute, record the observed pressure from gauge G-1 and time on.the Forni. 6 data sheet. Based upon the observed pressure rise (6 p) and the testing time, calculate the actual leakage rate" based upon teh formula below and record on the Form 6 data sheet. L' = 6P lid 60 (113.52) L'lid must be< 3.0 x 10-2 ATM-CM 3 SEC 6P must be MBAR 
*---. *
* 3.10 *' ... '*, ;"'\"() _,, ,. -2 If leakage rate is greater than 3.0 x 10 ATM-CC/SEC the unacceptable.
Refer to the TN-81 shipping cask operating for instructions on corrective action and retesting.
OP-4.3 . ADDENDUM 1 Page 2 of 2 NOV 4 1983 test is manual NOTE: Leakage Rate Calculation:
The following equation shall be the basis for the above lid leakage determination.
L' = (A p) x (V) (At) ATM 1013 mbar where t = acutal testing time, sec. p = t.he observed pressure increase (decrease in vacuum) observed during 3 the test 3 mbar. v = test volume, cm (115 cm) 3 L' = actual leakage rate (atm cm /s 
*
* 1.0 2.0 Cask Tightness Testing Introduction
-, . . r: '.f OP-4.3 ADDENDUM 2 Page 1 of 2 NOV 4 1983 This Addendum provides the procedure to be utilized for verifying the cask openings (Shield Plug "A", Blind Flange "B", and DRain Plug "C") are tested to insure that the leaktightness criteria for transport are met. The results of teh test are recorded on the Form 6 Data Sheet. 3.0 Cask Tightness Testing procedure.


===3.1 Ensure===
OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT IV-Page 1 of 3 r~-~           """;!]
the VDS is lined up in the evacuation mode as shown in Figure 11. 3.2 Open valves V-6 and V-2, check V-1, V-5 and V-7 closed. 3.3 Start the vacuum pump and evacuate the cask until a vacuum of 20-30 mbar is obtained as observed on G-1. 3.4 Close Valve V-6. 3.5 Wait approximately two minutes to allow the observed pressure on G-1 to stabilize.
                      ,.,1.~* *1  ~ .7                                                 NOV 4 1983
3.6 Note the vacuum reading and the time. a) Vacuum mbar b) Time 3.7 After two minutes, note the following:
: r. .
a) Vacuum mbar b) Time 3.8 Calculate AP and AT from steps 3.6 and 3.7 above . 
I-::....-*!.*.
* *
l
* 3.9 . --" . . . . ;
                *-::1         ...
[.,: L .. :., G .*~ OP-4.3 ADDENDUM 2 Pag~ 2 of 2 l'JOV 4 1983 Actual Leakage Rate (L') Calculation
H.P. RECEIPT SURVEY FORMS
-Based upon the increase in pressure, as observed on vacuum gauge G-1, over the minimum testing time (tmin) period, or during a longer time, the actual leakage rate (L') of the cask observed during teh tightness test is determined from the following equation:
L'=ful X (t) where: t = Llp = V = L' = (V) x atm 1013 mbar actual testing time in seconds the observed pressure change (decrease during the test in torr testing volume 3 in cm actual leakage rate in 3 atm cm /sec in vacuum) 3.10 Allowable Leakage Rate (L) -The allowable leakage rate (L) as calculated for a 30-day transport are based upon the calculations provided in the "Safety Analysis Report for TN-8 and TN-9 Packagings," Revision 7, dated September 8, 1976, Annex C to Chapter III, pages 313n through 13lt. The allowable leakage rate for a 30-day transport has been established as: L = 9.2 x 10-lO atm cm 3/sec . 3.11 If the test reveals that L'-< L, the test is acceptable.
Record results on Form 6. 3.12 If Cask Tightness Test is not acceptable (L' > L), refer to the TN-8L Shipping Cask Operating Manual for instructions or corrective action and retesting . 
...__ I I
* I . I l ) 1. Romove Shock Absorbl ng Covers and Impact Limiters 3. Attach 1.ift Beum to Casi< Shock Absorbing Cover 4. Rotate and Lift Cask ----.:--Shock Absorbing Cover--)o--j* ~!'act L_-. +*~f---. 1* 2. Release cask I * * * ,*. Tle-dow n r--r===i==,--, J ~,t-*-----. ,--t t1'.--' ---f. Trailer Loading/Unloading Operations Figure / . . I I I I I I !. . . .. I . , I '
* i " r, Slings t--:* r r ~i *-H*+-1* I &#xb5;, LJ .,* ( L . 
, Front Shock Absorbing Cover Cover Lifting Lug(2) y **--~'}--~. I M_-Lid .-A Lid L,ifting Lug ( '1) 'I Front Drum Lead-'-*--
C Fuel Compartment ( 3) [j Impact Limiter FJ -~Trunnion J2 -Lid I Impact Limiter Rec~ss (w/o Gussets) CASK OVERVIEW Figure~ Rear Shock Absorbing Cover I f H . I 'I ; I I I 
--* -------------
Gulde -+Plate ! / I I" I I .. -;~!-* *.J . *' .*.{ . '**.*-' --------~
,:, 't ..... ... . .! ; Arm Drive Cylinder -... d ..* *,i; Arm-Locking Cylinder ~-(End view) * . : I-~'] ) \ \11 f -\+: 8'-2" Primary Beam 6'-1" Seconda: Beam .-. . , ,).. *--J=:---.uir! i ~------*---:,.:.,-------
6 1 -2~1 -------..,-------___.:J
[g 1 w 'W t-'IGURF!
5 T,i ft Ri:tnm 1\c11:1nmh1" 
* *~ ;-:-:,~ C' -* *-.-. *-BypassJ Valve (2) . _::..,..:..i
*.:*.: .. f!'-~e/-lT Z ~Abt., ,:1r Actuating Cylinder NOV 4 1983 Locking Cylinder ( 2) { 2) .)l To Redundant Beam (as required)
~-----------
Pressure Gauge Air Controller Box Arms ~\. Open Locked ~Unlocke (Green) qp (Black) [j Air Cutoff Reset Arms Closed Lever 1_ Plant Air Supply --Schematic of Lift Beam Pneumatic Actuating System Figure 4-
* 0 Samole . Cylinder v-1r G-1 I 0-,: / :K:-V-3 _ v-2, .. I ' .... 1 2. I .,,..-,,-i n * . .,,ti: 'O I . '!-, I I I I I I I I I I I I I Cask I I I I I I I I I I I Blank I I ;2 in. Blank I/ 1 Filter v-s / KF-lOT Vac Pum Skid VDS in Sampling Mode Figure, fnT~z IA:6~ S' NOV 4 1983 To Gaseous Radwaste Discharge
,_ G-3 V-7 I r I I I I I I I I *1 I I I I I .L \ '.
0 I I I '-' I I I I I I I I I I NOV 4 v1-t l V-9 ,.; r----------_.,4.-.JL.-..~J-
--...... \ ' Connector "A2" v-rz.. \ I I I I ., I I ,. I cask I I CDS in cask Filling/Cooldown Mode Figure f, I I I 1 To Liquid Radwaste Drain/System
.... -1983 
-~ Connector "B" I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a:L-,,-.J
,, ___ -' CDS in Cask Connector "C II --. Cask Draining Mode Figure 9 --'\ \ To . Liquid Radwaste Drain t1!TT~-tlA't6N1
:z Mot: 1 NOV 4 1983 V-2 0 -I I I I I I I ..._, I I I I I I I Connector "B" I I ,-J I I I I-I I I I I I I "Al" \ Filter onnector "C" V-5 Drain Bottle Vac Pump Skid VDS in Vacuum Drying Mode Figure IC V-6 I\Tr~,'IIIC/JT I PAbc Y v-7 NOV 4 1983 To Gaseous Radwaste Discharge I I I V P .L ac ump *, \ '  
.... .--To NOV 4 Gaseous Radwaste Discharge 0 Samole Cylinder 4 I l v-11 * ~G-1 (d-,4,Kr v-3 v-2! 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Cask I I I I I I I I I I I I I Q'.' L I -I ,-.J ,"---;() ----Vacuum Hose -I I I I I I I I I I I I i--~--~~V-6 I Vac Pum KF-lOT . .
* VDS In Evacuation Mode Figure // 1983 
* * "-..,* -* rt"l'"Tt\Crvt\'t).f'c
..I PAbE' 10 . NQV 4 KF 50 Vacuum Flange 1983 --------2" SS Pipe Groove Connector "A-1" Figure t"Z..-... -' .
* 2" NPT 2" ss .. I ., I ,, I .'~ "'o;, , /~'7:?n . " L._O-Ringl Groove Connector "A-2" Figure I':] A~Z l1cbE II NOV 4 1983 .... -.. 
* .__, KF 50 Vacuum Flange ,;:-,.. < \.::; .....;...-_-i=__
_I~--3/4" SS Pipe t---I 11------..
I IL-----' \.------11 I I I 1 2.5" O.D. Tubing I I l I rt-1~., :tn J_-:.._-_-=_--:., 'r--__ ,. ., ____ .1, C. ----::. ~.:r Hansen coupling Socket Connector "B" Figure / 4-' KF 50 Vacuum Flange View A-A ,l/~ME"JJT .Z:. PkbG:" 1z. ** * -NOV 4 1983 \.
* * * '-' Hansen Couplir.g Socket -,_---. : "l ,r,-I ' I ;"--+-I i-t I -t-' I I I I r 3/4" ss Pipe A~ ) A...._j View A-A 2.5" O.D. Tubing Hansen coupling Socket Connector "C"
* Figure l& ,_ NOV 4 1983 ' .
* i . ** *~ f~>~r;. ....... Ri:}'"?g E:'.~i: ~, ....... ' r '~i-7-~* . ., ~Connection for 2" I.D. Hose 1/2" NPT _________
...__ \ \__O-Ring_
Groove .... -Connector "J" Figure :f7 1_ NOV 4 1983 ' .
* C n--11-l -=t-' -~ I I I ti--~-0 / I I n-j rr1 , , * ( ( Section AA I h-i-l.,..-Cask Bottom Trunnlons~t-\
i;~*-,, ,, +--,.-r-~--J ,* * .... f .,/ " ~===::..1====!:*
~-:<---Elastic Straps ti :Z, _;::;
* Trunnion Position Cut-out to End View Colnslde with Connector "C" ll-r -~ I A ""'l,-., ii">,.-** ' ..... *, ~-'**y 1 I ( 0(, ' )0 -~-*-~--t
* I B t B > : ~f w I Q) w Bottom Protective Cover ~t Figure l r-
*~ Lateral Guide {tygon tubing) Cable Tensioner_,..,.._
G) ~~~.*r .. * .... ''. *~ '\ Tape----Anr-PtWlEJJT" fAbe 1, NOV 4 1983 Seal of Skirt Ends Detail 1 Handle-~*i=::::J1 Cable (2 loops) Top and Bottom 0 ,~ Protective*
Skirt Installation Figure c..D \ .
e 11 (i' t N --C : : : -;j',, I '* I 1, I 2 . Pressure
* Welded Area --~--. c.-_--WiiS''S@.ri.
41,,,. talt'W ,, ,, ,,. ,, 1, ', I I ,, 11 II ,: ,, II ,, , , ,, ,: 11 II I' ti . " II II ,, -_-.:.: :. ":.. -. ---::, I '' QN4ffQ I$ 2 .@C .Q #P A Smooth Surface Section A*A (enlarged) b -q~i;;-=;t= , Lateral Gulde Tubing, -200" Top and Bollom I *"I i 1 1 1 c *. *1~ ,; ; : : : " \ *' ,,. '** 13' Rough Surface Section B-B ( . Plastic Skirt Protective Figure ~I r' , .. ' \--\
* Cask Cable Tensioner ( 7) Lateral! Guide *-* -~-* .J*. -*')'*~ i \,,..:.l,.*,~*
.. , *\11".:;.-:t*I'
'' Closure Bars for Protective Skirt Figure 2.~ . a, .... 11.ec* ( Protective (Plastic)
IL,(..+41......__
Skirt ~*-o, *** f't/ ,j "' f ,f r (* it .i ( z 0 < 00 w I I !i t '\ H B~C-k,_', Section A*A . ' Rotation.
Drum II oles ( 15) Cable Securing+
Screw (16) ( Locking Handle 7 l17) Cable* Tensioning
_ /Nut (19) 11 0" Ring for Tenslon (18) Section B*B Section C*C Skirt Cable Tensioner Figute 23' b''*,/' ,.,* .. **: i\ .. ~! (.*.: ?; ' *' c~
G)upper Bar See Detail 1 i-A I I I I I I I Section AA ( < Cable Tensioner
(?'i Lower Bar ~ee Detail 2 :-=:i,-H,--
---=.3-Lateral Guide . r ltrf~ENTZ PAGE zo NOV 4 1983 ,---r-= _j A I I I I Detail 1 I -I I I Protective Skirt Assembly Figure Z4 I_ L--'-=-L __ '.
3 ------------
+ -----~--14 (a) Lid --+-------+--------t--(b) Shock Absorbing Covers Lid and Cover Bolt Tightening Sequence Figure z.i, NOV 4 1983 \ . 
}' -; **.;,, ,~-(-';] '-<;/ ',; ,_;; --J -J ) -~-.1* .... ,,: \I_, }' ., ._, ., J CA~I(. Ul,,)f..OAOl,...,Q.
AR&#xa3; A ( S/-IR(.LC c.J) l.1l"'T1 ... G-T-'-)~..::1,0..:1$
U:.6e-t -I r ! / *---... t:=:::r-7,,'
---J::~--I *j ! . ;, Fu*L 7?01..t...
Vf L)l>O A. F&deg;I(;,~ Z..Co _J._ i ...._ ----~----:=:
___ Afr~c;,,..~_r-:--\
* .::. .: e'\-6e_u--:
-------1983 s N ..... :.. \ . 
.J .._. . } ,/ . ' *.? j . .) . ; i
* l . ' _ 1_ .* PAI:>&#xa3; 2.-3 NOV 4 1983 --tJ w "'---~--v'S.e L. 11, />. * .c ,=c!l&#xa3;NCf:
m1111,/t..
re IIV/Jt=J !AS/<. *S Ct+Vlif -* \ . 1= 
* * . _*.)~ .~ '*;,f/ ';, Connector "D" 0 cask ' Pirani Gage Head V-6 Filter V-7 V-5 Vac Pumo Skid VDS in Lid Tightness Testing Mode Figure 2CJ ---*-**--*
-* *-*-----. -----. er 4,3 f'rTT~~T f ?A--NOV 4 1983 To Gaseous Radwaste Discharge A Vac .l.. Pump , 148
:-:,";] . . *~ * * ::~\::/ , ..... ~<? ** ;. J FORM 6 "CASK LOADING LEADAGE RATE TESTING DATA SHEET" OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT II Page 1 of 3 NOV 4 1983 1.0 Lid Gaskets Leakage Rate Testing -See Addendum 1. 2.0 1.1 Initial pressure:
mbar --------Time: 1.2 Final pressure:
mbar ---------Time: 1.3 Test !:,.P: mbar ------------
Test !:,.t: seconds ------------


===1.4 Calculated===
OP-4.3
: 1.                                                    FORM 1 - CASK RECEIPT RADIAITION SURVEY FORM ATTACHMENT IV Page 2 of 3 NOV 4' 1983 SITE                                                  SURVEYED BY:                      ARRIVAL DATE/TIME CASK SERIAL NO:                                        INSTRUMENT:                      SURVEY.DATE:
PT      Contamination Survey Points                      dpm/100 1    Front Face - left 2    Front FAce - right 3    Lid Surface 4     Front Drum surface - left side 5    Front Drum surface - bottom 6    Front Drum surface - right side 7    Front Drum surface - top 8    Left Tr&#xb5;nnion/Impact Limiter 9    Right Trunnion/Impact Limiter 10      Bottom Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter 11      Top Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter 12      Fins - bottom front 13      Fins - too front 14      Fins - right side front
                                                -  15 16 Fins    - left side front Fins - bottom rear 17      Fins - top rear 18      Fins - right side rear 19      Fins - left side rear 20      Left Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter 21      Right Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter 22      Rear Drum surface - left side 23      Rear Drum surface - ri2ht side 24      Rear Drum surface - bottom 25      Rear Drum surface - top 26      Rear Drum base surface - center 27      Rear Drum base surface - left 28      Rear Drum base surface - right 29      Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) 30      Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside) 31      Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) 32      Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside)
Radiation Levels (mrem/h)
At Contact          3' From Surface        6' From Surface
                                                  ~T a
b C
d e
f 2
h


leak rate: 11 Lid = atm cm 3/sec --------1.5 Verify caluclated leadage rate is less than . -2 3/ 3.0 x 1-atm cm sec and test is acceptable:
                ?","'*.~
-----Cavity Drying and Dryness Verification 2 .1 2.2 Vacuum Drying Operations 2 .1.1 2 .1. 2 2.1. 3 Time: at start of vacuum drying --------operations Minimum cold wall temperature (t) as measured by thermocouple "Fl", "F2" or "F3": Location:
                ;.,. ,I , ,
Temperature:  
OP-4.3 f: *:)J\l                                . :=*!,*::; ;,:[                                      ATTACHMENT IV
&deg;F ------Water vapor pressure (P) in equilibrium with cold wall temperature, (t): Vapor pressure:
                                                        *!:>*_ ;;;*;: {                                        Page 3 of 3 NOV 4 1983 TRAILER RECEIPT RADIATION SURVEY FORM SURVEYED BY:              ARRIVAL DATE/TIME:
mbar --------Cavity Dryness Verification
INSTRUMENT:               SURVEY DATE/TIME:
FIXED  REMOVABLE LOCATION                              mrem/hr  dpm/100 1    Cask Drum Suooort 2    Tarpaulin Support 3    Rear Deck Plate 4    Rear Deck Plate 5    Trunnion Support -                 Front 6    Trunnion Support -                 Front.
7    Trunnion Support -                 Back 8    Trunnion Support -                 Back 9    Tarpaulin 10    Trailer Beam 11    Trailer Beam 12    Front Deck Plate 13    Front Deck Plate 14    Front Deck Plate 15    Tire Surface


====2.2.1 Cavity====
                                    - - ---- ------**--------*--- -------~---------
pressure at beginning of dryness verification:
                                            ~                                      - -------- ------------
Pressure:
OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT V
mbar --------Time: 
____ : -- *** "-. .:..:.1 *u
* *
                            ~-j; [
* OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT II Page 2 of 3 2.0 Cavity Drying and Dryness Verification (continued)
Page 1 of S NOV 4 1983 CASK LOADING REPORT
NOV 4 1983 2.2 3.0 Cask 3.1 3.2 Cavity Dryness Verification (continued) 2.2.2 2.2.3 Opening Blind 3 .1.1 3 .1. 2 3.1.3 3.1.4 Cavity pressure at end of dryness verification:
Pressure:
mbar Time: ----------
Verify cavity gas pressure rise is no greater then P/4 or 3.3 mbar, whichever is less: fl p: mbar --------fl t: Test is acceptable:
Tightness Testing -See Addendum 2. Flange "B" Test Initial pressure:
mbar Time: Final pressure:
mbar Time: Test flP: Test flt: Calculated leak rate: L'"B" = 3/ atm cm sec "C" Hansen Coupling Plug Test -3.2.1 Initial pressure:
mbar Time: 3*. 2 .2 Final pressure:
mbar Time: 3.2.3 '!'est flP: mbar Test flt: seconds 
*-* ~,... ,.-:--** ...... ...... i ;,.. ' OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT II Page 3 of 3 3.0 Cask Opening Tightness Testing (continued)
NOV 4 1983 3. 2 *
* 11 C 11 Hansen* coupling Pl*ug Test (continued}


====3.2.4 Calculated====
  *--*=*-*---------- -  -----~-----r--*--*-
OP-4.3 .
ATTACHMENT V Page 2 of 5 NOV 4 1983 CASK LOADING REPORT 1.0    Cask Loading 4.1    The following is a list of the fuel assemblies and isert components (if applicable) that have been loaded into the cask. The fuel assembly I.D. and ANSI numbers (if applicable) and their associated spent fuel cask locations have been verified by Fuel Resources personnel (See Section 5.3.22).
F.R. Representative Signature Date SHIPMENT NUMBER                                                                        ..
SPENT FUEL          FUEL ASSEMBLY          FUEL ASSEMBLY    INSERT COMPONENT CASK LOCATION        I.D. NUMBER            ANSI NUMBER      I.D. NUMBER 1
2 3
NOTE:  Lid orientation mark is adjacent to #3 fuel cavity.
Refer to Attachment I Fig. 28.
F/A I.D.          DECAY            TOTAL            WEIGHT OF          WEIGHT OF NUMBER            HEAT            ACTIVITY          FISSLE URANIUM    FISSLE PLUTONIUM KW              CURIES              GRAMS              GRAMS


leak rate: 3 L' -atm cm /sec "C" ---------3.3 Shield Plug "A" Test 3.3.1 Initial pressure:
mbar --------Time: 3.3.2 Final pressure:
mbar Time: 3.3.3 Test AP: mbar --------Test At: seconds --------r. 3.3.4 Calculated leak rate: L' -atm cm 3 /sec "A" ---------4.0 Total ACutal Leakage Rate 4.1 L' = L'Lid + L'"B" + L'ncn + L'"A" L' = --------------
: 4. 2 Test is acceptable if: L' < 9.2 x 10-2 atm cm 3/sec 4.3 Enter total leakage rate calculate~
above on the Cask Loading Report. Test is acceptable:
---------------------
QC: ---------------------
DATE: ---------------------
.~,-, ... , .--:---, .--;----*---... '-~ *~, ... --.. ..,..,.1 . I , ;
* CASK DEPARTURE FORMS OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 1 of 5 N.OV 4 1983 I 
* * * "SHIPPER"S CERTIFICATION FOR RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS" OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 2 of 5 NOV 4
* 1983 Transport No. --------Consigned to: -----------------------------
Place of Departure:
--------------------------
Destination:
-----------------------------
Shipper: -------------------------------
Proper Shipping Name: Radioactive Material, Fissile, N.O.S. -Number of Packages:
One (1) Material Quantity:
--------------------------
Acitivity of Package: curies ----------------------
Packaging Identification:
USA/9015/B( )F --------------------------------
Material Class: Radioactive Material ----------------------------
Name of Radionuclides:
Mixed Fission Products Transport Group to which material belongs: ---------------
II Category Label Applied: Radioactive Yellow II -----------------------
Transport Index: ---------------------------
Fissile Class of Package: -----------------------
Fissile Class III NOTE: Warning -Fissile Calss III Shipment.
Do not load more than one package per vehicle. In loading the storage areas, keep at least 20 feet (6 meters) from other packages, bearing radioactive labels . 
-***--.-.----**-
**--*--*-*------*
*-*--*-----*----*:
__________
...,.* -**** . -. *.* .. ---~-------*-*--*-----
*
* Description of the physical and chemical form of the material:
OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 3 of 5 NOV 4 1983 -----Irradiated Fuel Assemblies-*:
Highest dose at the external surface of the package: ----------
mrem/h ----------
Highest dose rate at one (1) meter from the surface: mrem/h -------Highest dose rate at two (2) meters from surcace of trailer: mrem/h ----------
Maximum level of non-fixed contamination of package and trailer: Beta, gamma: ------------( < 10 4 Ci/ cm 2) Alpha ------------( < 10 5 Ci/ cm 2) This is to certify that the above named materials are properly classified, described, packaged, marked and labeled, and are in proper condition for transportation according to the applicable regulations of the Department of Transportation.
Shipper's Representative:
-----------------------(Signature)
Date and hour of departure:
----------------------
Name(s) of driver(s):
-------------------------
Vehicle Identification Number: --------------------
Date and hour of arrival: -----------------------
Receiver's Signature:
-------------------------
f:.
:~ ' . . -* ' SITE CASK SERIAL NO: PT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 PT a b C ' d ' e f g h .. -, -*., -.y CASK TRANSPORT RADIAITON SURVEY FORM OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 4 of 5 NOV 4 1983 SURVEYED BY: DEPARTURE DATE/TIME INSTRUMENT:
SURVEY DATE: Contamination Survey Points dpm/100 Front Face -left Front FAce -right Lid Surface Front Drum surface -left side Front Drum surface -bottom Front Drum surface -right side Front Drum surface -top Left Trunnion/Impact Limiter Right Trunnion/Impact Limiter Bottom Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter Top Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter Fins -bottom front Fins -top front Fins -right side front Fins -left side front Fins -bottom rear Fins -top rear Fins -right side rear Fins -left side rear Left Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter Right Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter Rear Drum surface -left side Rear Drum surface -right side Rear Drum surface -bottom Rear Drum surface -top Rear Drum base surface -center Rear Drum base surface -left Rear Drum base surface -right Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside)
Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside)
Radiation Levels (mrem/h) At Contact 3' From Surface 6' From Surface --
VEHICLE NO. :
* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 I 15 OP-4.3 . ATTACHMENT III Page 5 of 5 NOV 4 1983 TRAILER DEPARTURE RADIATION SURVEY FORM SURVEYED BY: DEPARTURE DATE TIME: INSTRUMENT:
SURVEY DATE/TIME:
FIXED REMOVABLE LOCATION mrem/hr dpm/100 Cask Drum Support Tarpaulin Support Rear Deck Plate Rear Deck Plate Trunnion Support -Front ' Trunnion Support -Front Trunnion Support -Back Trunnion Support -Back Tarpaulin Trailer Beam Trailer Beam Front Deck Plate Front Deck Plate Front Deck Plate Tire Surface r~-~ """;!] r. . l ,.,1.~* *1 .7 I-::....-*!.*.
*-::1 ... -------*------*----
.. -. -* '" -. H.P. RECEIPT SURVEY FORMS OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT Page 1 of 3 NOV 4 1983 
*---______ __,__ -----**---*----. ----------
----------*--. ---------OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT IV Page 2 of 3 1. FORM 1 -CASK RECEIPT RADIAITION SURVEY FORM NOV 4' 1983 SITE SURVEYED BY: ARRIVAL DATE/TIME CASK SERIAL NO: INSTRUMENT:
SURVEY.DATE:
PT Contamination Survey Points dpm/100 1 Front Face -left 2 Front FAce -right 3 Lid Surface 4 Front Drum surface -left side 5 Front Drum surface -bottom 6 Front Drum surface -right side 7 Front Drum surface -top 8 Left Tr&#xb5;nnion/Impact Limiter 9 Right Trunnion/Impact Limiter 10 Bottom Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter 11 Top Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter 12 Fins -bottom front 13 Fins -too front 14 Fins -right side front -15 Fins -left side front .. 16 Fins -bottom rear 17 Fins -top rear 18 Fins -right side rear 19 Fins -left side rear 20 Left Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter 21 Right Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter 22 Rear Drum surface -left side 23 Rear Drum surface -ri2ht side 24 Rear Drum surface -bottom 25 Rear Drum surface -top 26 Rear Drum base surface -center 27 Rear Drum base surface -left 28 Rear Drum base surface -right 29 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) 30 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside) 31 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) 32 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside)
Radiation Levels (mrem/h) At Contact 3' From Surface 6' From Surface ~T a b C d e f 2 h 
. *---***--** --*-*-* ------------*****---****-*---
-----------------*-
---***------
?","'*.~ ;.,. ,I , , f: *:)J\l 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 . :=*!,*::;
;,:[ *!:>*_ ;;;*;: { OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT IV Page 3 of 3 TRAILER RECEIPT RADIATION SURVEY FORM NOV 4 1983 SURVEYED BY: ARRIVAL DATE/TIME:
INSTRUMENT:
SURVEY DATE/TIME:
FIXED REMOVABLE LOCATION mrem/hr dpm/100 Cask Drum Suooort Tarpaulin Support Rear Deck Plate Rear Deck Plate Trunnion Support -Front Trunnion Support -Front. Trunnion Support -Back Trunnion Support -Back Tarpaulin Trailer Beam Trailer Beam Front Deck Plate Front Deck Plate Front Deck Plate Tire Surface
____ : *,.,: --*** "-. .:..:.1 *u ~-j; [ * ------------**--------*---
-------~---------
---------CASK LOADING REPORT ------------
OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT V Page 1 of S NOV 4 1983 
*--*=*-*----------
------~-----r--*--*-
1.0 OP-4.3 . ATTACHMENT V Page 2 of 5 CASK LOADING REPORT Cask Loading 4.1 The following is a list of the fuel assemblies and isert components (if applicable) that have been loaded into the cask. The fuel assembly I.D. and ANSI numbers (if applicable) and their associated spent fuel cask locations have been verified by Fuel Resources personnel (See Section 5.3.22). F.R. Representative Signature Date NOV 4 1983 SHIPMENT NUMBER .. SPENT FUEL FUEL ASSEMBLY FUEL ASSEMBLY INSERT COMPONENT CASK LOCATION I.D. NUMBER ANSI NUMBER I.D. NUMBER 1 2 3 NOTE: Lid orientation mark is adjacent to #3 fuel cavity. F/A I.D. NUMBER Refer to Attachment I Fig. 28. DECAY HEAT KW TOTAL ACTIVITY CURIES WEIGHT OF FISSLE URANIUM GRAMS WEIGHT OF FISSLE PLUTONIUM GRAMS 
-~ -----------*
-~ -----------*
* 2.0 **,.:-::*.  
                    **,.:-::*.                                                           OP-4.3
**-*.*.:..;?
:*.~ 'C!f                              ATTACHMENT V
:*.~ 'C!f l Cask Preparation for Shipment OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT V Page 3 of 5 NOV 4 1983 2.1 Cavity dryness verification test satisfactory  
                          **-*.*.:..;?                 l                                Page 3 of 5
-------2.2 Record final cask cavity internal pressure:
* 2.0 Cask Preparation for Shipment 2.1 2.2 Cavity dryness verification test satisfactory Record final cask cavity internal pressure:
psia -------------*  
NOV 4 1983
 
                                  -------------*psia 2.3           Maximum dose rate at cask surface:
===2.3 Maximum===
a)     beta, gamma (8       ):
dose rate at cask surface: a) beta, gamma (8 ): mrem/h ----------------
                                                              ----------------mrem/h b)     location:
b) location:  
2.4           Maximum dose rate at three (3) feet from cask surface:
------------------------
a)     beta, gamma (8       ):
 
                                                              ----------------mrem/h b)     location:
===2.4 Maximum===
2.5           Maximum removable surface contamination of the cask surface:
dose rate at three (3) feet from cask surface: a) beta, gamma (8 ): mrem/h ----------------
2 a)     alpha, beta, gamma (       ):             dpm/ 100cm b)     location:
b) location:  
: 2. 6           Maximum removable surface contamination of the trailer:
------------------------
2 a)     alpha, beta, gamma (       ):             dpm/100cm b)     location:
 
2.7           Maximum dose rate at the outer surface of the vehicle, (as measured along the trailer protective enclosure perimeter) with the cask installed:
===2.5 Maximum===
a)     beta, gamma (8 .):
removable surface contamination of the cask surface: a) alpha, beta, gamma ( ) : dpm/ 100cm ----------
                                                              ----------------mrem/h b)     location:
2 b) location:  
------------------------
: 2. 6 Maximum removable surface contamination of the trailer: a) alpha, beta, gamma ( ): dpm/100cm 2 ----------
b) location:  
------------------------
 
===2.7 Maximum===
dose rate at the outer surface of the vehicle, (as measured along the trailer protective enclosure perimeter) with the cask installed:
a) beta, gamma (8 .): mrem/h ----------------
b) location:  
-----------------------
2.0 Cask Preparation for Shipment (continued)


===2.8 Maximum===
OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT V Page 4 of 5 NOV 4 . 1983 2.0 Cask Preparation for Shipment (continued) 2.8   Maximum dose rate at six (6) feet from the outer surface of the vehicle:
dose rate at six (6) feet from the outer surface of the vehicle: OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT V Page 4 of 5 NOV 4 . 1983 a) beta, gamma ca ) : mrem/h ______________
a) beta, gamma ca ):
___; b) location:  
mrem/h b)  location:
2.9  Maximum dose rate inside the truck cab:
beta, gamma <a a)                  ):
                                ---------------mrem/h b)   location:
NOTE: Attach complete radiation and contamination forms to this report.
2.10  Cask Departure:  TIME: _____________
DATE:


===2.9 Maximum===
OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT V Page 5 of 5 NOV 4 1993
dose rate inside the truck cab: a) beta, <a ) : mrem/h gamma ---------------
: 3. 0  Remarks:
b) location:
(
NOTE: Attach complete radiation and contamination forms to this report. 2.10 Cask Departure:
QC Inspector:
TIME: ____________
Data Recorder:
_ DATE: --------------
Date Time Responsible Supervisor:
* 3. 0 Remarks: ( OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT V Page 5 of 5 NOV 4 1993 QC Inspector:  
*}}
--------------------
Data Recorder:  
----------------------
Date -----------
Time -----------
Responsible Supervisor:  
---------------------}}

Latest revision as of 05:05, 23 February 2020

Procedure OP-4.3, Shipping of Spent Fuel TN-8L Shipping Cask,Loading & Handling Procedures.
ML18142A136
Person / Time
Site: Surry, 05000000
Issue date: 11/04/1983
From:
VIRGINIA POWER (VIRGINIA ELECTRIC & POWER CO.)
To:
Shared Package
ML18142A135 List:
References
REF-GTECI-A-36, REF-GTECI-SF, RTR-NUREG-0612, RTR-NUREG-612, TASK-A-36, TASK-OR NUDOCS 8412120350
Download: ML18142A136 (121)


Text

FOR REF ERENCE r:~i f :RY OP-4. 3 Page 1 of 76

.: VIRGINIA ELECTRIC AND POWER COMPANY SURRY POWER STATION UNIT NO. 1 AND 2 NO\J 4: 1983 SHIPPING OF SPENT FUEL TN-BL SHIPPING CASK LOADING AND HANDLING PROCEDURES 1.0 References 1.1 Operating Manual, TN-SL Spent Fuel Cask Operations 1.2 NUREG 0612 Heavy Loads 2.0 Purpose 2.1 This procedure outlines the methods of receipt, placement in the Spent Fuel Pool, loading Spent Fuel, Removal from Spent Fuel Pool, decontamination, dryness verification, Integrity Testing and shipment of the TN-BL Spent Fuel Shipping Cask.

1.1.1 Unloading Cask from truck 1.1.2 Prepa*ration of Cask for loading spent fuel 1.1.3 Cask loading 1.1.4 Preparation of Cask for departure

(~-s41212oa-soa4iiao----~

l I

PDR ADOCK 05000280 p PDR -

r~,

~ ~,r~ OP-4.3 Page 2 of 76 NO\J 4. 1983 3.0 Initial Conditions 3.1. The cask has arrived at Secur~ty Gate.

3.2 Security has notified Health Physics and Operations of Cask arrival.

3.3 Security has verified seals have not been tampered with and recorded Seal Numbers.

3 .4 QC has been notified.

3.5 Fuel Building Roll-up Doors and Decon Bldg. North access hatch at operating deck of Fuel Building are accessible.

3.6 The water level in the Spent Fuel Pool is at less than maximum.

3.7 A current Fuel Storage Area map is available.

3.8 Health Physics has performed its initial Radiation Survey at the gate and is prepared for the Cask to be brought on Station.

3.9 The Spent Fuel Handling Tool is available. The Spent Fuel Cask Handling Crane, and th Fuel Pit Bridge Crane, are operable. Also, hand tools are provided in storage boxes outside, in Decon. Bldg. and in Fuel Building.

3.10 Portable underwater lighting in Spent Fuel Pool is available.

3.11 A VNF-7 Form has been initiated and approved for shipment of Fuel from Surry Power Station and Fuel Assembly and device History Sheets are available.

3.12 The Cask Service Equipment, Utilities, and special tools are on hand and operable.

OP-4.3 Page 3 of 76 NOV 4: 1983 3.0 Initial Conditions (continued) 3.13 Health Physics Coverage available for Cask Handling Operation

  • per the applicable H.P. Procedures and Radiation Work Permit.

3.14 Area prepared and accessible to Crane for lifting beams.

3.15 Access to Fuel Building via the stairwell between the Fuel Bldg. and Decon. Bldg. is made available during operation.

3.16 The Crane hook, block and cables are clean and lubricated.

3.17 Personnel involved have been instructed in the proper use of tools and equipment utilized.

3.18 The continuous Radiation Monitoring System of the Fuel Bldg.

is in service, and air activity*i.s being continuously f .

monitored.

3.19 Decon Bldg. ventilation in operation.

3.20 Condensate Water Supply and hoses are available at Spent Fuel Pool to wash down Cask upon leaving water.

3.21 Spent Fuel Data has been obtained from Fuel Resources and is on copy of Cask Loading Report. Cask Loading Report to be provided by Surry Power Station and transmitted with the shipment.

3. 21.1 Spent Fuel Shipment Number 3.21.2 Spent Fuel Assembly Serial Number and Insert Number.
3. 21. 3 Spent Fuel Location within the Cask 3 .21.4 Decay Heat content (KW) 3.21.5 Total Activity of Element (CURIES) 3.21.6 Weight of Fissile Uranium (GRAMS)
3. 21. 7 Weight of Fissile Plutonium (GRAMS)

OP-4.3 l~rtr Page 4 of 76 ltd eu.i., NOV 4 1983

  • 3.0 Initial Conditions (continued) 3.22 A Supervisor from Operations will be in charge of fuel movements in order to certify the proper records are completed and to ensure a smooth evolution.

3.23 Fuel Resources Personnel will be notified prior to any fuel movements.

3.24 The Transportation Documents have been received from tlie carrier and are in good order.

3.25 All fuel assemblies stored in Region 1 (SfSA rows 31 through

48) of the Surry spent fuel pool are on the most recent revision of the "Surry Region l Fuel Eligibility List".

3.26 Auxiliary cask handling equipment has been tested in accordance with ANSI Nl4.6

  • OP-4.3 Page 5 of 76 NOV 4 1983 4.0 Precautions and Limitations 4.1 All Fuel Handling Equipment will have been tested prior to handling the shipping Cask and Fuel Assemblies.

4.2 Positive and accurate records will be maintained at all times.

4.3 Cask shall not be moved outdoors when threat of severe weather disturbance exists.

4.4 Slings, shackles, and cables shall be checked to verify that they appear to be in good working order.

4.5 The cask and all handling tools and equipment are massive and heavy. Many pinch point hazards exist. A very slow swing of the suspended cask will contain a large amount of energy. Be careful in the cask equipment moves.

4.6 The Cask in the upright position is sixteen (16) feet high, which constitutes a fall hazard. Improper rigging can cause a cask or equipment drop.

4.7 The surface of a loaded cask at equilibrium may be uncomfortably hot.

4.8 It is imperative that the cask handling crew be thoroughly familiar with cask equipment, potential hazards and proper handling procedure. Also, all safety rules and equipment are available to perform all areas of cask handling safely.

4.9 All personnel in Fuel Building, taking part or observing work, shall be familiar with Station Emergency Plan and AP for Fuel Failure

  • r-* * ~,

Ii~~-

OP-4.3 Page 6 of 76 NOV 4 1983 4.0 Precautions and Limitations (continued) 4 .10 - Car-e should be taken to keep the skirt inlet and vent hoses as short as possible. Excessive lengths may result in interference problems. The hoses should be allowed to hang freely but not allowed to become entangled.

4.11 Thorough planning should be done prior to cask immersion to ensure that immersion times are minimized. Normally, the shorter the immersion time, the less severe the contamination problems incurred and associated decontamination efforts.

4.12 Do not allow Cask to dry prior to decontamination.

4.13 Operation of the Fuel Building Bridge and Trolley Crane will be accomplished by qualified crane operators.

4.14 Safety belts will be worn by personnel as necessary to

  • prevent falling into Spent Fuel Pool.

4.15 All hand tools used over Spent Fuel Pool or Cask Area will have lines attached to prevent their dropping into the pool.

4.16 When fuel handling is in progress, all doors will be shut in the Spent Fuel Building, except for the movement of people or equipment.

4.17 Prior to moving Fuel Building Bridge Crane into the vicinity of the Cask Area, ensure cask crane has been moved clear so as not to obstruct the path of the bridge crane.

!? ~:*-~;~~*~t~*;' ?~~;

a:!:.:.u ~uti,_.tJ ~t~.....

OP-4.3

"'-'*-~*r..c Page 7 of 76 NOV 4 1983

  • 4.0 Precautions and Limitations (continued) 4.18- Whenever the lifting beam or special service tools are being moved underwater, at least one person other than the man controlling or directing the crane movement, must be observing the lifting beam or service equipment. The lifting beam or service equipment shall.not be moved when visibility problems obscure their underwater movement.

4.19 DELETE 4.20 Avoid excessive "jerky" motion of crane when carrying fuel.

4.21 When handling fuel, the fuel handling tool should be supported by hand, to prevent.unnecessary swinging action.

4.22 Move trolley and bridge smoothly when moving fuel.

4.23 Insure the locking device is in place prior to lifing fuel assembly.

4.24 Always ensure adequate clearance exists between the top of the Fuel Assembly Storage Racks and the bottom of the Fuel Assembly prior to moving fuel horizontally in pool, and when placing Fuel Assembly over the shipping cask.

4.25 Minimum allowable depth of water between top of Spent Fuel and surface of water is 8 feet while moving fuel.

4.26 Minimize axial loadipg during the last few inches of travel when setting an assembly down or attaching a handling tool by jogging the crane at minimum possible speed

  • OP-4.3 Page 8 o'f 76 NOV 4 1983 4.0 Precautions and Limitations (continued)
4. 27. *. -The Fuel Building Bridge Crane should be parked over the new Fuel Storage Area and the power supply disconnect switch shall be open and padlocked with an Administrative Control Lock whenever it is not in use.

4.28 Any fuel assembly movement will be proceeded by Form VNF-7 issued from the Refueling Office with the Superintendent of Operations approval signature affixed for fuel assembly position changes.

4.29 In the event of anything abnormal occurring during operations, stop and have situation evaluated by the Supervisor

,:,~r NOV 4 1983

. ' . . ? U_.,

~'F~

Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck 5 .1.1 Initial conditions are noted and satisfied.

5 .1.2 Precautions and Limitations as noted.

5.1.3.1 Release the tarpaulin in tie-down along the sides of the trailer by pulling the elastic tie-down ropes from the trailers tie-down hooks.

5.1.3.2 Release the trailer rear tarpaulin section by unbuckling the leather straps along each side of the tarpaulin releasing the bottom bf the tarpaulin.

5.1.3.3 Roll-up the rear tarpaulin section and secure it in this position by placing the straps around the tarpaulin and buckling the straps to the tarpaulin roof section

  • OP-4.3 Page 10 of 76 t*"f'J k i'..:.i~

NOV 4 1983

~ 5.0 Pro*cedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.3.4 Slide the enclosure forward by having one man at ground level on each side of the trailer grasp the side section of the tarpaulin and pull it towards the front of the trailer (this will result in sliding the roller mechanism forward).

Slide the enclosure until the tarpaulin is drawn as far as possible against the front of the enclosure. A rope and pulley are also located on the inside of

  • the trailer front wall to assist in pulling the tarpaulin forward. The mechanism can then be locked in place by the pin locks on the rails.

NOTE: If it is undesirable to limit the cask or cover lift height during removal from the trailer, the lengths of the slide mechanism roller tracks may be removed between the track support posts. This removal is done by retracting the spring loaded pins from the ends of the track and removing the track section.

NOTE: Steps in the: "Loading Procedure", marked by an asterisk(*), indicate information is required to be entered on the referenced form or report .

OP-4.3 Page 11 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)

  • 5 .1.4 Perform Cask and Trailer Radiation Surveys and Record Data on "Cask Receipt Radiation Survey".

Complete the Survey Forms and retain for documentation requirements. This is performed and document by Station Health Physics Department.

5.1.5 Health Physics requirements should be checked to determine if protective clothing (e.g. gloves) are required.

  • 5 .1. 6 Remove Security Seals. (Seals on front and back shock absorbing covers). Remove seals.

5 .1. 7 Remove (6) trunnion impact limiters per the following instructions: (two on lower end of cask, four on upper end of cask). See figure 2, Attachment 1.

Required Equipment Waterproof Tape Ratchet 13/16 inch socket Ratchet drive extension 50 ft. tape measure

OP-4.3 Page 12 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)

Trunnion

  1. 1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 5.1.7.1 Remove the limiter 9/16" bolt.

NOTE: As the bolt is removed, manually restrain the trunnion impact limiter (approximate weight of a trunnion impact limiter is 45 lbs).

5.1.7.2 When the bolt is removed, remove the trunnion impact limiter from the i

trunnion.

.------ 5.1.7.3 Inspect the threads of the 9/16" bolts trunnion hole.

holes.

Tape over the bolt 5.1.7.4 Store the bolts and trunnion impact limiter in their prescribed storage area.

NOTE: If storage is made in a contaminated area the trunnion impact limiters should be covered with a sheet of plastic, etc. to avoid their contamination.

Repeat steps 5.1.7.1 thru 5.1.7.4 for the remaining trunnion impact limiters. The front cradle dust cover plate must be swung back to gain access to front trunnion on underside of cask

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.8 Position trailer under unloading crane and release front trunnion guide assembly and rear trunnion tie-down per the following instructions: Make reference mark of position of trailer for loading/unloading operations, by taping a line on the side of the trailer midway+/-~ inch between cask front and rear trunnion center lines. Locate the trailer centered laterally on the road way+/-~ inch so that the cask trunnion mid point is over the crane centerline mark on the road+/- 1 inch *

  • Required Equipment Ratchet 3/4 inch socket (for trunnion guide assembly bolts) 1 1/8 inch socket (for rear trunnion bolts) 1 1/8 inch open end wrench RIGHT LEFT Front Trunnion 5.1.8.1 Remove the load binder handle restraint chain from the trailer chain securement hook.

5.1.8.2 Release tension from the front trunnion restraint by lifting up on the binder handle

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)

RIGHT LEFT 5.1.8.3 Remove the binder attachment hook from beneath the trunnion tie-down support lip.

5.1.8.4 Swing the binder assembly free of the cask trunnion by pivoting around the tie-down rod pivot pin. Lay the binder assembly on trailer deck.

5.1.8.5 Repeat steps 5.1.8.1 through 5.1.8.5 for the second front trunnion tie-down.

Trunnion Guide Assembly Removal 5.1.8.6 Swing back the front cradle dust cover plate from the underside of the trailer.

5.1.8.7 Remove the two hex head bolts and their lock washers.

5.1.8.8 Remove the trunnion guide assembly from the trailer (this frees the lower redundant trunnion and allows cask removal from the trailer).

5.1.8.9 Remove the two bolts and their lock washer from the rear trunnion tie-down.

5.1.8.10 Lift the rear trunnion collar free of the cask rear trun~ion.

5.1.8.11 Repeat steps 5.1 .* 8.9 and 5.1.8.10 for the second rear trunnion tie-down.

OP-4.3 f:~ ~~?~~~!!?'~ r,~r. ~~~,

~; ~*' *' ,* ..... ...

V:,

Page 15 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~-

  • 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)

RIGHT LEFT 5.1.*9 Remove the shock absorbing covers per the instructions below and apply two layers of tape over each shock absorbing cover bolt and alignment pin hole on the front and rear front. See figure land 2 in Attachment 2.

Required Equipment 2 legged sling equipped with connections to allow attachment to the lifting crane auxiliary hook (bale) and to the cover connecting shackles

  • (loops, etc.)

2 connecting shackles Ratchet Ratchet drive extension 1 7/8 inch socket Storage area (for covers)

Plastic or tarpaulin cover (if necessary, see step

5. 1. 9. 7 Note) *

~ ton chain fall with dynamometer 2 25 ft. ropes

OP-4.3 Page 16 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)

FRONT REAR 5.1.9.1 Center the crane auxiliary hook directly over the shock absorbing cover to be handled. There is no preference in the shock absorbing cover removal sequence; either may be removed first. Lower the crane auxiliary hook and attach to chain fall dynamometer assembly.

5.1.9.2 Attach the 2 legged sling lifting bale to to the dynamometer.

5.1.9.3 Attach the 2 legged sling to the 2 lifting lugs of the shock absorbing cover by means of the 2 connecting shackles.

5.1.9.4 Carefully raise the auxiliary hook to take slack out of the cable; then, by use of the chain hoist pick-up approximately 850 to 900 lbs as indicated on the dynamometer.

5.1.9.5 Remove the four shock absorbing cover bolts. The 2 top bolts should be removed before the 2 bottom bolts.

Inspect bolts for wear and grease with

  • Never-Seeze prior to re-installation.

OP-4.3 Page 17 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)

FRONT REAR NOTE: Due to the angle of the covers from the vertical, care should be taken when removing these bolts as the bottom of the rear cover could swing out from the cask when its bolts are removed.

5.1.9.6 Gently move the shock absorbing cover away from the cask until the cover centering pins are clear of the cask.

Lift the shock_absorbing cover using crane auxiliary hook.

5.1.9.7 Move the shock absorbing cover to its designated storage area and disconnect the 2 shackles from the shock absorbing cover lifting lugs.

NOTE: If the storage area is dirty or contaminated, the covers should be stored on a sheet of plastic or a tarpaulin and covered. Care should be exercised in I '

handling and storing cover bolts to prevent thread damage.

5.1.9.8 Transfer the crane hook and 2 legged sling to the other shock absorbing cover

['?'~F~ i'.:'fl ~ ~*~ ~

  • J -~1..: . NOV 4 1983

~

  • 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)

FRONT REAR 5.1.9.9 Repeat steps 5.1.9.1 thru 5.1.9.7 for the other shock absorbing cover.

5.1.9.10 Remove the 2 legged sling assembly from crane auxiliary hook.

5 .1.10 Attach main hoist of cask crane to horizontal lifting beam using the following steps:

5.1.10.1 Traverse the crane over the stored horizontal lift beam. Lower the hook between the yoke plated, insert the pin,

  • and lock the pin in place with the keeper plate. Apply Never-seeze grease to all four lifting pendant bearing surfaces.

5.1.10.2 Raise the horizontal lift beam clear of its supports and rotate it on the hook swivels to that the front end (short pendants) is oriented toward the front of the cask. Raise high enough for the cask. Apply Never-seeze to cask trunnions.

OP-4.3 Page 19 of 76

.ITIALS w:;r

~...,,~~

NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.11 Lower the beam slowly and guide the trunnion plates past the trunnions until they can be slipped on.

Raise the locking bars, slip the plates over the trunnions and release the locking bars so that they rest on the trunnions inside the trunnion lip thus preventing the plates from coming off, NOTE: If difficulty is experience in attaching a rear trunnion plate because the cask is not centered on the trailer, it will be necessary to shift the cask to a central position first.

5 .1.12 The cask should be raised carefully until it is clear above the supports. The front will rise about 8 inches before the rear trunnions lift off their supports. If, at this time, it appears necessary to control lateral movement of the cask, ropes should be attached at the trunnions and held on the ground.

5.1.13 When the cask is clear of the trailer, the trailer should be driven out. The cask can then be lowered until it is near the elevation of the tilting frame trunnion supports. Rotate cask 90° to align cask with tilting frame. Apply Never-Seeze to tilting frame trunnion supports .

OP-4.3 Page 20 of 76

~ "*"l ,.

~* *, .** ' ;i NOV 4 1983

~;.. - _*:,

~

- 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5 .1.14 The rotated cask is then traversed over the tilting frame and lowered until the rear trunnions are in their supports. Care must be taken to center the rear trunnions within~ inch as they contact the supports. Once they are positioned the cask can be fully lowered.

5 .1.15 With the pendents slack, the locking bars can be raised and the trunnio~ plates removed from the trunnions. Raise the horizontal lift beam and traverse to the stora.ge supports. Lower the horizontal lift beam onto the supports. Disengage the hook pin, raise the hook, store the pin in the yoke plates.

5 .1.16 Attach lifting beam to crane hook using following steps:

5.1.16.1 Lower the crane hook between the strong back plates of the lift beam. Align the

. four-inch hole in the crane hook with the four-inch hole in the lift beam. (A sleeve adapter is to be required as the center hole of crane is larger than the 4 in. diameter pin). See figure 3, Attachment 1 .

OP-4.3 Page 21 of 76 rJ:'.'... *: :;;(

~;;,.)j .: ... ...,* .._ NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck) (continued) -

5.1.16.2 Insert the four-inch diameter pin and install the keeper plate.

NOTE: If manual engagement of lifting beam is desired, N/A step 5.1.17.

5.1.17 Connect air system to lifting beam and insure operability as follows:

(Refer to figure 4).

5.1.17.1 Connect the air controller to an air supply of 75-100 PSIG.

5.1.17.2 Attach as many 50 ft. long sections of flexible hose !o the three quick-connectors on the air controller as needed. The hoses and quick connectors are color coded to assure proper connection.

5.1.17.3 Connect the three hoses to the fittings on the right hand side of the beam as one faces the side with the piping.

(hoses, piping and air controller are color coded).

5.1.17.4 Verify that the bypass toggle valves on the beams are in the closed position

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5.1.17.5 Observe whether the lifting arms are in the released or engaged position. Set the arm control lever on the air controller to the same position.

5.1.17.6 Set the green handle of the locking cylinder valve to the "locked" position.

5.1.17.7 Depress the black handled toggle valve on the air controller until line pressure is indicated on the pressure gauge. Releasing the toggle will close this valve.

NOTE: The system is now operational. It is always operated in the following sequence:

Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "unlocked".

Move the arm positioning lever to the desired position. Llfting beam latching mechanism fails to "engaged" 1:osition. Air may be disconnected once engaged for ease of movement of cask. Visually verify that the arms have moved fully to the desired position.

Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "locked" .

OP-4.3 Page 23 *of 76

-~ ... -~ ....

NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure, (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued)

CAUTION: Do not attempt to move the arms when the green handle is on "locked". However, if this should happen, return the arm positioning lever to the position corresponding with the current position of the arm of the beam before opening (unlocking) the locking cylinder.

When the system is in the "locked" position, visual confirmation is provided by small metal flags which are moved by the end of the locking pin. These flags extend horizontally when the system is fully locked and can be seen from the surface of the pool when the cask is under water. The location of these flags may influence the position of the beam with respect to the cask (i.e., whether 180° rotation is desired) before the cask goes into the pool.

Note that the arm repositioning will take a few seconds more,if:

  • The air lines are especially long
  • Air pressure is on the low side
  • The system is in redundant configuration.

Allow sufficient time before returning the green handled valves to the "locked" position .

OP-4.3

  • -,:-i'

.... ~ ... ,....... ~ .... Page 24 of 76

~*\~ r'?-,*--~

-~ ... - ~-...., NOV 4 1983

~

  • 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5 .1.18 Apply Never-seeze grease to the lifting shoulder of front horizontal trunnions and to the engagement surface of the lifting arms. Position the lift beam over the front trunnions and engage the lift beam to the trunnions.

5.1.19 Tilt the cask to the vertical position using the crane. Maintain crane and cables in a vertical position over lifting trunnions as the cask is tilted to the vertical position. Lift the cask off*

the tilting frame.

5.1. 20 Transfer the cask to the decon. area (Decon Bldg.),

installing the bottom protective cover as the cask is lowered onto the pad per the following instructions: See figure 18.

5 .1. 20 .1 Prior to lowering the cask onto the decontamination pad, place the Bottom Protective Cover onto the decontamination pad.

5 .1. 20. 2 Lower the cask until its bottom region is approximately 6 inches above the bottom cover.

5.1.20.3 Manually lift the bottom cover and fit it onto the cask rear face (approximate weight 30 lb.).

  • 1983 ITIALS
5. 0 Procedure' ( con tisued) 5.1 Unloading Cask From Truck (continued) 5 .1. 20. 4 Attach the cover to the cask by looping the cover attachment cables over the lower cask trunnions and securing them to their attachment point on the bottom cover.

5.1.20.5 Slowly lower the cask onto the decontamination pad.

NOTE: Start VDS warm-ur *.

(

5.1.21 Disengage the lift beam and move it to the fuel bldg. for attachment of the lid lifting sling .

5 .1. 22 Attach the lid lifting sling to the lift beam.

5 .1. 23 Proceed to section 5.2 for Preparation of Cask prior to unloading.

Date:

OP-4.3 Page 26 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel.

5.2.1 Initial condition are noted and satisfied.

5.2.2 Precautions and Limitations are noted.

Skirt Operation Precautions The skirt's condition should be checked on a routine basis. Special attention to leakage inspections is advised. If leaks are identified, the area shall be patched using a reinforced plastic patch kit.

5.2.3 Install the plastic protective skirt around the finned length of the cask per the instructions provided below:

  • Skirt Installation Allen wrench - 3/8 inch Crescent wrench (adjustable)

Never-Seeze grease, or site approved equivalent Waterproof tape Ratchet wrench Torque wrench 0-100#

3/8" hex set screw socket 5.2.3.1 Place plastic protective cover on top surface of cask.

OP-4.3 Page-:27 of 76 Nov 4 1983

\I!:.->;~~

ITIALS _;: I~ '.i 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.3.2 Remove the skirt from storage. Unroll it and inspect it to ensure that it is in an acceptable condition (i.e. no holes, acceptable contamination levels, etc.,) Check condition of skirt accessories, water hoses, connectors "Jl" and "J2" cables, cable tensioners, and screws. Grease screw threads if necessary.

NOTE: Item numbers used in this section are shown in figures 20, 21, 22, 23, 24.

5.2.3.3 Insert the 2 pins (4) of the lower bar into the cask skirt lugs (11) and manually wrap the skirt around the cask utilizing the handles (5).

5.2.3.4 Insert the 2 pins (3) of the upper bar into the corresponding holes of the skirt lower bar (2). Install the 13 screws (22) to close the skirt.

5.2.3.5 Locate the upper skirt lateral guide (Ba) in the cask front drum groove.

OP-4.3

~~*~7'1 Page 28.of 76

~*: :: :'..; (r\,; ,., . -

. ;.: .._.. 1 :'..:;,

  • (:_-:'t.L ..ili NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.3.6 Position the cable as shown in Fig. 20 detail 1. The cable is wrapped "below" the lateral guide (i.e. between the lateral guide and the cask center).

Wrap the cable once around the cask as shown in Fig. 20.

5.2.3.7 Insert the cable under the upper bar (1) and into the drum groove (insert cable in groove shown in Fig. 20, detail 1 and wrap the cable around the cask a second time, while carefully positioning the cable in the cask drum groove, "below" the lateral guide (as shown in Fig. 20, detail 1).

5.2.3.8 Pull the cable taut and check that the cable is correctly positioned in the drum groove.

5.2.3.9 Insert the free end of the cable through the rotation drum hole (15) of the rotation drum (14) of the upper skirt cable tensioner (7). (Refer to Fig. 20 and Fig. 23) .

OP-4.3 Page 29 of 76

.... -.. ,: . *. --~

NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Lo-ading Spent- Fuel ( continued) 5.2.3.10 Lock the cable by tightening the cable locking screw (16). (Fig. 23) 5.2.3.11 Attach the locking 0-rings (18) to the locking handles (17) as shown in Figure 23 (the 0-ring forces the locking handles down onto the rotational drums (14) and prevents rotation. This keeps the cables under tension).

5.2.3.12 Attach wrenches to the cable tensioning nuts (19) and turn the rotation drums as

  • indicated by arrows in section AA of Fig. 24.

time.

Turn both drums at the same The locking handle should be pulled up to allow the rotation drum to turn. When the cable is sufficiently tensioned, push the locking handle (17) firmly down to ensure that it is seated against the rotation drum (14).

(Fig. 23)

5. 2. 3 ..13 Locate the lower lateral guide (8b) in the cask rear drum groove. (Fig. 20)

OP-4.3 Page 30 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.3.14 Repeat steps 5.2.3.5 through 5.2.3.12 for the lower skirt cable tensioner (6)

(the cables placed between the lateral guide and the center of the cask).

5.2.3.15 Install a layer of water proof tape along the upper and lower edges of the skirt as shown on Fig. 20, detail 1.

Tape also to be installed over the upper bar after the screws have been installed. This reduces skirt water supply requirements by improving the skirt sealing.

5.2.4 Remove the .blind flanges from openings "Jl" and "JZ" and install the connectors "Jl and "J2" and torque the bolts to 35 ft-lb per the following instructions:

5.2.4.1 One torque wrench equipped with a 3/8 hex set screw socket suitable for setting torques or 35 ft-lbs is required.

5.2.4.2 Install the three bolts for each flange and torque the bolts to 35 ft-lbs in counter :lockwise direction.

OP-4.3 Page 31 of 76

-.. - ~"'-' NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued)

Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.4.3 Repeat the torquing of the bolts to 35 ft-lb in a counter clockwise direction.

5.2.5 Remove the blind flange from opening "B" using the 3/8 inch hex set screw socket.

5.2.6 Perform radiation survey of the exposed recess of opening "B" (y at contact) 5.2.7 Seal the cask front face shock absorbing cover bolt and alignment pin holes by applying two layers over each hole.

5.2.8 Remove grease from all trunnions except for areas that come in contact with the lifting arms during handling between the decontamination pad and the pool.

5.2.9 Equalize the cask cavity atmosphere as follows:

5.2.9.1 Install the VDS in the Sampling Mode as shown on Figure 7. Ensure valves V-1, V-2 and V-3 ar closed and Connection "B" is blanked off at the 2 inch vacuum hose connection prior to connecting to the cask, (and sample cylinder is attached, optional).

NOTE: Cask sampling will be optional as desired by the fuel handling supervisor

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.9.2 Measure t.he cask internal cavity pressure by opening valve V-2 and reading the pressure off gauge G-1.

Close valve V-2.

5.2.9.3 Dependent upon the measured cask internal cavity pressure, perform the following:

If the measured pressure is less than atmospheric, vent the cask cavity to atmosphere by disconnecting 2" blank from the "B" connector. See Figure 7 and 14.

NOTE: Insure the Decon bldg. exhaust vent is in service and is in the filter mode.

If the measured pressure is greater than atmospheric, release cask pressure by opening valve V-3 thereby venting the cask cavity to gaseous radwaste.

Discharge line is connected to valve V-3 prior to opening valve V-3. When cask is at atmospheric pressure, close valve V-3.

OP-4.3 .

Page 33 of 76

--,:.. .,..,...~ - n::...,.:~7 V."l:i.-

ITIALS L. **  :;~°k~:~[~ NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued)

NOTE: N/A steps 5.2.9.4 thru 5.2.12 if fuel handling supervisor desires sampling to be deleted.

NOTE: VDS pump must be started for this evolution.

5.2.9.4 Purge the gaseous sample cylinder, "B" connector and associated piping as follows:

5.2.9.5 Remove the "B" Connector with sample cylinder from cask.

5.2.9.6 Open valves V-1, V-2 and V-3.

.- 5.2.9.7 Start vacuum pump and run for three minutes to evacuate sample cylinder, Connector and associated piping.

"B" 5.2.9.8 Close valves V-1, V-2, V-3 and stop vacuum pump.

5.2.9.9 Reconnect "B" Connector with sample cylinder to cask Hansen Coupling at "B" flange opening.

5.2.9.10 Open valves V-1 and V-2 to draw sample from cask cavity into sample cylinder.

5.2.9.11 After collecting the sample, isolate the sample cylinder by closing valves V-1 and V-2; then remove "B" Connector from cask.

OP-4.3 Page 34 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued)

I 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.9.12 Remove the sample flask and analyze cask gaseous.activity for fission gas content.

5.2.10 Initiate Cask Filling as follows:

Refer to Figures 2, 8, 12, 15 and 13 5.2.10.1 .Remove the blind flange form opening "C" and survey the recess.

5.2.10.2 Remove the shield plug from opening "A".

NOTE: When removing or working i? the area of shield plug "A", care should be exercised as radiation streaming may be present.

5.2.10.3 Install the CDS in the Cask Filling/Cooling Mode as shown in Figure

8. Install Connectors "A2", install the three bolts and torque to 35 ft-lb as per steps 5.2.4.1 thru 5.2.4.3 (Fig 13).

Ensure valve line-up is as shown with valves V-9 and V-10, V-11, V-12 closed .

OP-4.3 Page 35 of 76

'.*-:-.... -, .. '.. ~~

  • ,,*, . " NOV 4 1983

,. ,.:.:: :J/,IL f

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.10.4 Open valve V-9, and V-11.

5.2.10.5 DELETE 5.2.10.6 Initiate filling water ~low through the CDS by opening valve V-10.

Establish a cask cavity filling water inlet flow rate by throttling valve V-10. Continue to fill the cask cavity

  • ' .. through connector "C".

5.2.10.7 DELETE 5.2.10.8 When no entrained air is visible in vent hose flow, stop the flow of fill water.

Close valve V-10, open V-12.

5.2.10.9 Remove Connector "A2" and Connectors "C" and drain the CDS lines.

5.2.10.10 *Install shield plug "A" without bolts.

NOTE: Since the shield plug "A" is not torqued, the cask cavity is vented providing thermal expansion protection.

OP-4.3 Page 36 of 76 NOV 4 1983

.., ' . . . :_*.:; ...... ,:~

\3

~

  • ; *1r; 5.0 P~ocedure (continued) 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.10.11 Attach a drain line to Connector "C" and reinstall Connector "C" to the cask to adjust the cask water level until it is approximately twelve (12) inches below the top of the cask lid. (i.e. drain 2 gallons).

5.2.10.12 Disconnect Connector "C" from the cask (Hansen coupling at "C" is self-sealing).

5.2.10.13 Visually inpsect the gaskets of the QC blind flanges for "B" and "C" to ensure they are free of cuts, grooves, gouges or cracks. Particular attention should be given to observe "feathering" at teh edges. An indication of normal conditions will be that the seating surface appears as a somewhat flattened area. If the inpsection indicates a gasket defect, the gasket should be replaced

  • OP-4.3 Page 37 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.2 Preparation of Cask for Loading Spent Fuel (continued) 5.2.10.14 Reinstall. the flanges of openings "B" and "C" per the procedure in Steps 5.2.4.1 - 5.2.4.3 and tape flanges.

5.2.11 Remove the port plug from opening "D". See Figure 2.

5.2.12 Loosen and remove lid bolts per the following procedure: See Figure 25.

5.2.12.1 Select one bolt and loosen 1/4 turn.

5.2.12.2 Continue loosening all remaining bolts by 1/4 turn following the sequence as numbered on Figure 25.

  • 5.2.12.3 Repeat the loosening of the lid bolts by another 1/4 turn by repeating the procedure in steps 5.2.12.1 and 5.2.12.2.

5.2.12.4 Upon completion of both 1/4 turn cycles, all the bolts may then be removed.

5.2.12.5 Inspect removed bolts for damage, store and protect bolts from contamination in bolt storage box.

5.2.13 Remove plastic protective cover from top surface of cask.

5.2.14 Proceed to Section 5.3 for loading of cask.

  • Completed By:

Date:

OP-4.3 Page 38 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS .-  :--

5.0 Ptoced1Ire (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading 5.3.1 Apply never-seeze grease to lifting trunnions on areas that come in contact with lifting arms during cask handling between the decontamination pad and the spent fuel cask area of the pool.

5.3.2 Position lifting beam (still attached to cask crane main hook) over the cask.

5.3.3 Connect air system to lifting beam and insure operability as follows:

(Refer to figure 4).

5.3.3.1 Connect the air controller to an air supply of 75-100 PSIG.

5.3.3.2 Attach as many 50 ft. long sections of flexible hose to the three quick-connectors on the air controller as needed. The hoses and quick connectors are color coded to assure proper connection.

5.3.3.3

  • Connect the three hoses to the fittings on the right hand side of the beam as one faces the side with the piping.

(hoses, piping and air controller are color coded).

5.3.3.4 Verify that the bypass toggle valves on the beams are in the closed position.

OP-4.3 Page 39 of 76

.;*~~~

tj.~ ; . ';,* NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.3.5 Observe whether the lifting arms are in the released or engaged position. Set the arm control lever on the air controller to the same position.

5.3.3.6 Set the green handle of the locking cylinder valve to the "locked" position.

5.3.3.7 Depress the black handled toggle valve on the air controller until line pressure is indicated on the pressure gauge. Releasing the toggle will close this valve.

NOTE: The system is now operational. It is always operated

  • in the following sequence:

Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "unlocked".

Move the arm positioning lever to the desired position. Lifting beam latching mechanism fails to "engaged" position. Air may be disconnected once engaged for ease of movement of cask. Visually verify that the arms have moved fully to the desired position.

Set the green handled locking cylinder valve to "locked" .

OP-4.3 Page 40 of 76 NOV 4 1983 TIALS 5.0 Pr.ocedure (continued) '"' .. <,*' ~*

-. *' j; ._. .-~ ... I.

5.3 Cask Loading (continued)

CAUTION: Do not attempt to move the arms when the green handle is on "locked". However, if this should happen, return the arm positioning lever to the position corresponding with the current position of the arm of the beam before opening (unlocking) the locking cylinder.

When the system is in the "locked" position, visual confirmation is provided by small metal flags which are moved by the end of the locking pin.

These flags extend horizontally when the system is fully locked and can be seen from the surface of the pool when the cask is under water. The location of these flags may influence the position of the beam with respect to the cask (i.e., whether 180° rotation is desired) before the cask goes into the pool

.-.~. -. NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued)

Note that the arm repositioning will take a few seconds more if:

The air lines are especially long Air pressure is on the low side The system is in redundant configuration Allow sufficient time before returning the green handled valves to the "locked" position. -

5.3.4 Lower the lifting beam into position with th_e guide arms resting on the top surface of cask trunnions.

5.3.5 Attach the lid lifting sling to the cask lid. Make trial lid lifts, adjusting the lifting sling as necessary so that the lid raises in a level attitude and no binding relative to the cask occurs.

5.3.6 Engage the lifting beam to cask trunnions as described in note in Step 5.3.3. Install four lid bolts hand tight.

5.3.7 Lift the cask off the decontamination pad and transfer to the Fuel Building .

-..,_ OP-4.3 Page 42 of 76 Llj tJ~£J~*,~£ NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.8 Rotate the cask to orient the skirt fill and vent connections ("Jl" and "J2") in order to facilitate connection and disconnection when cask is in the water. (See Figure 26).

5.3.9 Attach the fill hose to "Jl" when cask is in position over the spent fuel pit cask area.

5.3.10 Lower the cask into the cask area while filling the skirt volume with cond. water such that the skirt internal volume water level is maintained approximately 6 11 to 12" above the cask area water surface.

NOTE: When cask is in position establish reference mark on floor (use plumb bob suspended from cab of crane) for future alignment of crane.

5.3.11 Reduce crane speed and water flow rate into the skirt as the skirt water level approaches the top of the skirt. When the entire skirt volume is full (indicated.by water issuing from the "J2" port),

connect floating vent to connector "J2", and tie off float at floor level allowing _overflow to return to the s.F.P

    • --* -. , NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.12 Disconnect water fill line from cond. hose and connect to water level box.

CAUTION: Ensure water fill line is held approximately one half(~) foot above vent at all time during this step. Make up to water level box with cond. hose.

5.3.13 Maintain an approximate one-half(~) foot water head over-pressure inside the skirt by maintaining the water level in the water level box approximately one half(~) foot above the vent.

NOTE: This prevents inleakage of contaminated water, and must be maintained at all times while cask is submerged.

5.3.13.*1 Remove the four remaining lid bolts and place them in the bolt box.

5.3.14 Continue lowering the cask to the cask pad at normal crane speed while continuing to maintain the one-half(~) foot of water over-pressure in the skirt.

5.3.15 Gently place the cask on the pad.

(Figure 26).

NOTE: Utilize underwater camera as an aid to determine distance when cask is approaching bottom.

OP-4.3 Page 44 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.16 Release the lifting beam from the cask.

(Refer to Section 5.3.3 - Air Locking System Instructions).

5.3.17 Remove the cask lid as follows:

5.3.17.1 Slowly raise the crane hook in "jog" speed until the cable is slightly taut.

Note the height of the crane hook cables. (This is done by noting a reference point on the crane cables, etc.).

5.3.17.2 Slowly raise the cask lid in the jog speed until the lid lifts freely out of the lid recess area. Reference mark the crane position.

NOTE: If the lid shows signs of binding, lower the crane hook until the cable is slack and carefully check the crane hook vertical .. alignment over the lid center and _adjust as necessary. Repeat steps 5.3.17.1 and 5.3.17.2 as needed.

5.3.18 Once lid is free, continue lifting the lid in normal speed.

5.3.19 Raise the lifting beam from the cask area.

5.3.20 Wash down the main hook, cables and lift beam with P.G. water as they exit the pool.

OP-4.3 Page 45 of 76 NOV 4 . 1983 ITIALS

... *, . . 1;:.: ~*

5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.21 Install the Front Face Protective Cover per the instructions below and as shown on Fig. 19. Fuel pit bridge may be used as a working platform.

5.3.21.l Attach a tag line to each cover handling cable.

CAUTION: Prior to bridge travel, ensure there are not obstructions.

5.3.21.2 Orient the cover over the lid recess area such that the 2 lid centering pins are in alignment with the b*osses of the cover.

5.3.21.3 Lower the cover onto the cask until it is fully down (i.e. slack cable). The cover is designed such that the edges of the cover will center it correctly.

NOTE: If the cover position is not correct, slowly lift the cover clear, adjust its position as needed by rotating t~e crane hook and repeat Steps 5.3.21.2 and 5.3.21.3. Utilize underwater camera as necessary .

OP-4.3 Page 46 of 76 NOV 4 7983

~

~~2~ rr~ r ,,

... *' 1 ;_:'

5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.21.4 Using the tag lines, position the cables such that they hang along the side of the cask and are out of the way of fuel unloading operations. Tie off ends of tag lines at operating level.

  • 5.3.22 Per the instructions below, load the fuel assemblies into the cask cavity. Fuel Resources will verify each fuel assembly I.D. number, ANSI number and cask location. Record the position of each fuel assembly and insert component (if applicable) in the "Cask Loading Report". Refer to VNF-7 for fuel locations and see Figure 28 for fuel orientation in the cask."

NOTES: 1. Any lateral position adjustments of the fuel handling tool must be done with the fuel assembly outside the cask fuel compartments during loading operations or with the fuel assembly disengaged from the fuel handling tool during.unloading operations (unless otherwise specified in these instructions).

2. It is recommended that reference height indications be marked on the fuel handling equipment such that they can be referred to, to assist in determining fuel assembly heights .

OP-4.3 Page 47 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) * ~ ::

~il"~.~j 5.3 Cask Loading (continued)

NOTES: (continued)

3. During all fuel transfer operations performed in the pool, ensure that the fuel assemblies are free of all obstacles throughout transfer.
4. Fuel Resources personnel will be notified prior to any fuel movements.

Fuel Assembly Loading 5.3.22.1 Attach the fuel handling tool and load scale to the bridge crane hook, adding a safety sling between the hook and the tool.

5.3.22.2 Transfer the fuel handling tool to a point directly over the fuel assembly to be loaded into the cask. Refer to VNF-7.

5.3.22.3 Verify that the fuel handling tool is centered over the desired fuel assembly.

If it is not, adjust its position as needed. Ensure that the fuel handling tool is free of any obstacles during these adjustments.

OP-4.3 Page 48 of 76

~

.NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.22.4 When alignment is satisfactory, slowly begin lowering the fuel handling tool onto the fuel assembly.

5.3.22.5 Continue lowering the fuel handling tool until it is completely down on the fuel assembly (i.e. no weight on load cell).

5.3.22.6 Engage the fuel assembly with the fuel

    • *
  • handling tool and .lock handle.

f' .

5.3.22.7 Slowly raise the fuel assembly while closely monitoring the load scale for excessive load changes.

5.3.22.8 Continue slowly lifting the fuel assembly until its bottom nozzle is above the storage racks.

5.3.22.9 Transfer the fuel assembly to its spent fuel cask location. Refer .to VNF-7, and Figure 28.

5. 3. 22 .10 . Slowly lower the fuel assembly into the designated spent fuel cask location while closely monitoring the load scale for excessive load changes. After the fuel assembly seats on the bottom of the cask, disengage the fuel handling tool
  • from the fuel assembly."

OP-4.3 Page 49 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) -*~~-

5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5 .3 .22.11 Repeat Steps 5.3.22.2 thru 5.3.22.10 until the cask is load.

5.3.22.12 Store the fuel handling tool in its storage area and disconnect it" from the crane hook.

5.3.23 Remove the front face protective cover from the cask:

5.3.23.1 Slowly remove the cover from the front face by lifting the tag lines. Verify that cover is removed without binding, etc.

5.3.23.2 Transfer the cover to its storage area and store properly.

5.3.24 Replace the cask lid on the cask per the following instructions:

  • 5.3.24.1 Transfer th_e lid to the position directly over the cask cavity lid

_ seating surface using cask area crane by positioning crane at reference mark established in Step 5.3.17.2.

OP-4.3 Page 50 of 76 NOV 4 . 1983

.ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.24.2 Establish correct cask cavity lid orientation (orientation markers) and lower it to a height of about 4 feet above the cask. Check lid alignment and orientation as needed.

NOTE: This a~ignment is important and should be done carefully. Angular orientation is to be established by lining up the cask and lid orientation marks prior to installing the lid. The lid should be rotated as needed.

5.3.24.3 Slowly lower the lid into the lid recess.

NOTE: Lateral and rotational adjustments of the lid may be made as the lid nears the cask front face but no lateral movement of the crane should be made once the lid has entered the lid recess. If further lid position adjustments are needed, the lid should be lifted unt~l it is free of the lid recess and above the cask.

5.3.24.4 If the lid indicates significant binding during crane descent, slowly raise the lid in the jog made until it is again free of binding and raise the lid out of

  • the lid recess. Check the lid alignment and repeat Steps 5.3.24.2 and 5.3.24.3.

I - .,

t:"" 1'C='l")up=

,_ OP-4 3

\.-i VIRGi/JIA EL'ECTR1 C .t-.1\'V PO[{=R COMPANY ' ""' '- v NUMBER:

  • SURR,' PC)(t1~R STA TIO/\

( 2)

PROCEf'URE DATE: ~NOV 4 1983

  • -. -*- (3) ( !; )

T~'P~ PROCEDURE: OPERATIONS PROCEDURE UNTT #: 1 & 2 (5)

TTTL'E: IRRADIATED FUEL HANDLING & SHIPMENT

( 6)

LIST OF EFFECTIVE REV1S10NS:

SECTIOI--' DATE 1.0 . tt~'

.J. 4 19S3

    • ~;!~:* C 2.0 .":./ .-NOV 4 1983

. ,;  :- ~

3

  • 0. :*) ,. .. '~ :1 *.\, :NOV.: ....

4 1983

-< 4

  • o:_;: ~;,;i::T>r<  :*. : ,. NOV 4 1983
  • . *._ ~- -*._  ;..,,-**

-* .._-:_.-. ~. 3 . o-_*.:,*-* . ; **"::::* _::

~~; .

~;.-

NOV 4 1983

.*
  • ~
./-'.ATTACHMENT

.'j.**

ATTACHMENT II ATTACHMENT :~~!

I NOV 4 NOV 4

  • NOV 4 ._:* t983_.)

1~3:.

~.";,:.

.-.~~.. . :**_;." ::-

-~---:

ATTACHMENT I.;'.

1983

( 7)

DATE: II Q.UAL7T\' COI-JITOL ( ';f~ J\ ( :.: )

../ I .. ! _\_~, .. '\._.I_/

o VATE:

/

  • APPROVED STAT1 O,~ A,"l OPER.l.T1 NG COMlJ.TTTEE: , --

I : * ) (:...:.)

,.,.~

, DATE: NOV 4 198]

OP-4.3 Page 51 of 76 NOV ,4 1983

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.24.5 As the lid nears its full down position, ensure that the 2 centering pins are protruding through their respective lid flange holes.

NOTE: Use binoculars and/or underwater camera as needed to perform this evolution.

5.3.24.6 If they do not protrude stop crane descent. Slowly raise the lid a few inches.

5.3.24.7 Twist the crane hook in whichever

  • direction is needed by referencing the lid orientation marks. Return to Step 5.3.24.3 and continue lid installation.

5.3.24.8 Continue lowering until the lid is fully

_ _ _ _QC down as indicated by slack cable in the sling cables. Visually verify the lid for proper installation. (i.e. visual looks to be seated and the alignment pins protrude from the lid plate).

OP-4.3 Page 52 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.25 Lower the lifting beam slowly until its guide arms are resting on shoulders of lifting trunnions.

5.3.26 Engage the primary lift beam to the cask lifting trunnions as outlined in Step 5.3.3.

5.3.27 Raise the cask from the bottom of the cask area.

5.3.28 Continue raising cask until top face is approximately even with operating deck.

5.3.29 Check and grease (using Never-Seeze) the threads of all removed cask bolts and screws as needed.

.- 5.3.30 Remove water from four bolt holes (with an aspirator) prior to returning four lid bolts which were removed in Step 5.3.13.1.

NOTE: Each bolt is associated with a specific bolt hole.

Check bolt number with hole number.

5.3.31 Replace the above mentioned lid bolts in their respective hole and hand tighten.

5.3.32 Remove four legged sling from lid lifting lugs by removing fo~r shackles.

5.3.33 Continue raising cask form the SFP.

OP-4.3 Page 53 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~ 5.0 Ptoeedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.34 As the cask is removed from the water, the water inlet flow should be reduced and finally stopped as the top of the skirt surfaces from the pool. At all times the flow rate should be such that approximately al foot skirt overpressure is maintained. Control the crane speed to maintain but not exceed the one foot skirt overpressure.

5.3.35 - When vent hose connection "J2" reaches surface, remove the hose connection to short_en the drainage flow path. Disconnect from float line. Mate ends of hose together to form a circular hose. This prevents internal contamination of hose. Store hose.

5.3.36 Slowly remove the cask from the pool while thoroughly washing down the lift beam top, skirt and base of the cask with a water spray to remove particulate and soluble contaminates.

5.3.37 Disconnect "Jl" hose from water level control box.

5.3.38 Insert hose into Unit 2 transfer canal skirt.

Observe level inside skirt while draining; maintain this level approximately one foot above cask area water level by raising cask as required.

5.3.38.1 Obtain water sample from drain hose flow for isotopic analysis.

OP-4.3 Page 54 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.3 Cask Loading (continued) 5.3.39 When skirt has completely drained and cask has been pulled completely out of the water, disconnect "Jl" hose from "Jl" connection *

. 5. 3. 40 Position the crane above the open Decon Building access doors and lower cask into the Decon building.

5.3.41 Set cask down gently and disengage primary lifting beam from cask.

5.3.42 Raise primary lifting beam back up into the Fuel building, and transfer to a position above the

-* 5.3.43 5.3.44 storage stand.

Decon lift beam and crane hook.

Dry all cask surfaces with clean rags as soon as practicable.

5.3.45 Decontaminate exposed cask surfaces as necessary including outside of skirt.

5.3.46 Proceed to Section 5.4 for Preparation Of Cask For Departure.

Completed By:

Date:

OP-4.3 Page 55 of 76

~

NOV 4 7933 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure 5.4.1 Initial conditions are noted and satisfied.

5.4.2 Precautions and Limitations are noted.

5.4.3 Verify that the port plug from opening "D" is removed.

5.4.4 Remove water from bolt holes using an aspirator and install remaining lid bolts and tighten all lid bolts to the specified torque as follow:

Required Equipment

- torque wrench suitable for setting SQCIJ torques of 40 to 290 ft-lb SQC# 7/8" socket

- drive extension 5.4.4.1 Install all bolts and tighten to hand tight.

5.4.4.2 Tighten all bolts to 40 ft-lb in the following fashion:

5.4.4.3 Tighten the bolts to 40 ft-lb following the numerical sequence as shown in Figure 25.

5.4.4.4 Repeat the cycle of Step 5.4.4.3

____QC starting with bolt number 1 until all bolts are torqued to 40 ft-lb .

OP-4.3 Page 56 of 76 NOV 4 1983

~

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.4.5 Tighten all lid bolts to the final

_ _ _ _QC required torque of 290 ft-lb by following the procedure in steps 5.4.4.3 and 5.4.4.4.

  • 5.4.4.6 Perform Lid Gasket Tightness Test per Addendum Ill.

5.4.5 Remove the blind flanges. from openings "B" and "C",

and thermocouple well port plugs "Fl", "F2" and "F3". Install thermocouples.

5.4.6 Install the CDS in the Cask Draining Mode as shown

  • 5.4.7 on Figure 9. Drain the cask cavity water to the Decon Building sump until no more water comes out.

Remove shield plug from "A".

5.4.8 Connect the VDS to the cask cavity through shield plug opening "A" as shown on Figure 10, 12. Ensure valves V-2, V-3, V-4, V-5 and V-7 are closed and valve V-6 is open. Install drain bottle in Connector "C".

NOTE: To facilitate operations, it is recommended that a curve be plotted of cask internal pressure (mbar) versus pumping time during cask drying .

OP-4.3 Page 57 of 76 NOV 4 1983

'"J i 5.0 Procedure (contitiued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued)

  • 5.4.9 Open valve V-2 and start the vacuum pump with the gas ballast valve open. Observe the cask cavity pressure using the gauge G-1 using valve V-6 to throttle the vacuum pump suction.

NOTE: The cask cavity pressure will normally show an initial steep pressure decrease until a pressure corresponding to the vapor pressure of the residual liquid in the cavity is reached. At this point, the cask cavity pressure will remain nearly constant showing a plateau region. This plateau will be

  • observed to be at a pressure e~?al to the vapor pressure corresponding to the temperature of the cold wall of the cask cavity (anticipated pressure:

14 mbar - 35 mbar).

5.4.10 When the vacuum reaches approximately 40 mbar, close valve V-6 and remove blind flange on "B" Connector (Fig. 14) to* break vacuum, forcing any water drain into the drain bottle.

CAUTION: Be careful to retain "O" Ring when removing flange; vacuum could suck it in if not careful .

OP-4.3 Page 58 of 76

/, I -( ~ NOV 4 1983

.** "'7 ~

~ 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of .Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.11 Replace bind flange on "B" Connector, and open valve V-6 and continue pumping until the pressure is back down to approximately 40 mbar. Continue to repeat this step as long as a level increase is observed in the drain bottle.

5.4.12 When no significant level increase in the drain bottle is noted, disconnect connnector "C" from the cask and continue vacuum pumping using valve V-6 to obtain a cavity pressure of approximately 20 mbar.

NOTE: Monitor the cask cavity internal pressure. As the

  • last of the residual moisture is removed by the vacuum pump, the internal pressure as monitored on gauge G-1 will show a second steep pressure decrease. Ensure the cask cavity pressure is not pumped below 7 mbar, which could cause freezing of the remaining water.
  • 5.4.13 Measure the temperature (T) of the cask cavity walls*

using the thermocouples installed in wells "Fl",

"F2" and "F3". Determine the water vapor pressure (P) in equilibrium with the coolest cavity wall temperature reading.

5.4.14 Continue vacuum drying until a pressure of less than

~p (but not less than 7 mbar) is achieved) .

.. ** 1 I

OP-4.3 Page 59 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued)

  • 5.4.15 Isolate the vacuum pump from the cavity by closing valve V-6. Record initial pressure and time on test data sheet. (See Form 6)
  • 5.4.16 The cask cavity is considered dry if a rise in

_ _ _ _QC pressure does not exceed P/4 or 3.3 mbar, whichever is less, during a period of 10 minutes (record final pressure and time on test data sheet). See Form #6.

5.4.17 If the pressure increase exceeds the above limits, open valve V-6 and start vacuum pump for further vacuum drying. Continue to repeat dryness verification until criteria of Step 5.4.16 are met.

5.4.18 Upon successfui completion of the cask cavity dryness verification, disconnect the VDS by disconnecting connector "Al" from the Shield Plug opening "A".

5.4.19 Reinstall shield plug "A" and torque bolts to 35 ft.

- lbs. in a clockwise direction from the first bolt.

5.4.20 Repeat the torquing of the bolts to 35 ft. - lbs.

_ _ _ _QC in a counter-clockwise direction.

5.4.21 Readjust the VDS to place it in the Evacuation Mode as shown in Figure 11.

5.4.21.1 Perform Cask Tightness Test per Addendum 2.

OP-4.3 Page 60 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued)

  • 5.4.22 Adjust the cask cavity internal pressure to 0.3 bars, absolute (-10 psig) using valve V-3 (not connected to the gaseous radwaste discharge line) as a vent to atmospheric pressure and by the operation of the vacuum pump (valve V-6 must be open during vacuum pump operation). Record the final pressure on the "Cask Loading Report".

5.4.23 Remove the VDS including Connector "B".

5.4.24 Remove the tape and plugs from the cask front face bolt holes.

5.4.25 Check external contamination of all exposed surfaces of the cask and decontaminate as required.

5.4.26 Survey the recesses for openings "B" and "C".

5.4.27 Remove thermocouples and replace well port plugs "Fl", "F2" and "F3", port plug "D" and the blind flanges for openings "B" and "C", and tighten all bolts and plugs to the specified torque per the following instructions:

5.4.27.1 Thermocouple well port plugs "Fl", "F2" and "F3" and port plug "D". One torque wrench equipped with a 1-3/8" socket, suitable for setting torques of 35 ft-lb is required.

OP-4.3 Page 61 of 76 NOV 4 ITIALS 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.27.2 Install plug to hand tight, then torque

_ _ _ _QC to 35 ft-lb.

5.4.27.3 Bolts for the blind flanges of openings "B", and "C".

One torque wrench equipped with a 3/8"

-hex set screw socket, suitable for setting torques of 35 ft-lb is required.

5.4.27.4 Install the three boh: :,. for each flange f .

i and torque the bolts to 35 ft-lb in a clockwise direction from the first bolt.

5.4.27.5 Repeat the torquing of the bolts to 35

_ _ _ _QC ft-lb in a counter clockwise direction.

5.4.28 Remove the protective skirt as follows:

NOTE: Do not remove the skirt until all required external cask decontamination operations are complete.

Removal of the skirt prior to the completion of these steps risks contamination of the cask fins.

5.4.28.l Remove connectors "Jl" and "J2".

5.4.28.2 Remove any remaining tape from the upper and lower skirt edges and unwrap the tensioning cables, freeing the skirt from the drum grooves

  • OP-4.3 Page 62 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.28.3 Remove the 13 screws from the upper and lower skirtbars. (Note: Remove the bolts from bottom to top).

5.4.28.4 Check that both the upper and lower lateral guides are free of the drum grooves.

5.4.28.5 Remove the skirt from the cask using the skirt handles (Fig. 20) (5). Hang skirt on storage ring.

5.4.28.6 Check the skirt contamination level.

Decontaminate if necessary until acceptable levels are attained.

Normally, washing the skirt with clean water and a soft cloth is sufficient to decontaminate the skirt.

5.4.29 Survey the cask/skirt joints now exposed and the finned surfaces of the cask for contamination and decontamina_te as required. Reinstall flanges "Jl" and "J2" and torque 3/8" hex head bolts to 35 ft-lb.

5.4.30 Transfer cask crane to a position above the cask and lower lift beam.

5.4.31 Grease the surfaces of the lift beam arms, outer front trunnion shoulders and rear trunnion inner

  • shoulders with Never-Seeze.

OP-4.3 Page 63'of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.32 Re-engage lift beam arms (see 5.3.3) and lift the cask off the decontamination pad and remove the Bottom Protective Cover per the following instructions:

5.4.32.1 Disconnect the bottom cover attachment cables from the cask trunnions and fold them to the side of the cover so they are not in the way.

5.4.32.2 Slowly lift the cask off the decontamination pad. As the cask is lifted, remove the bottom cover from the cask. Decon the cask bottom surface.

5.4.32.3 Check the bottom cover for contamination. Decontaminate as needed.

5.4.32.4 Transfer the cover to its storage area.

5.4.33 Remove tape from alignment pin and bolt holes and survey for removable contamination and decontaminate the rear cask face as required.

5.4.34 Transfer the cask to a position over the rear trunnion supports of the tilting frame.

5.4.35 Grease rear trunnion supports with Never-Seeze grease.

OP-4.3 Page 64 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) -*,.E, 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.36 Lower the cask bottom trunnions onto the tilting frame rear trunnion supports.

NOTE: Cask should be oriented such that drain "C" will face upward, after cask is tilted into a horizontal position.

5.4.37 Carefully rotate cask to horizontal position.

CAUTION: Maintain crane and crane cables in a vertical position over lifting trunnions while performing tilting of cask.

5~4.38 Disengage the lifting beam from the cask and return it to its storage stand in the Fuel Building.

5.4.39 Perform contamination survey required by H.P. on cask surfaces inaccessible after shock absorbing cover and impact limiter installation.

5.4.40 After releasing lift beam from cask crane main hook, position main hook over horizontal lifting beam

  • OP-4.3 Page 65 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued).

5.4.41 Lower main hook between the yoke plated, insert the pin, and lock the pin in place with the keeper plate.

5.4.42 Return truck and trailer to the loading/unloading position as indicated by reference mark established in Step 5.1.8 - "Unloading Cask From Truck".

5.4.43 Raise the horizontal lift beam clear of its supports and rotate it on the hook swivel so that the front end (short pendants) is oriented toward the front of the cask. Raise high enought for the trunnion plates to clear the cask. Traverse the beam directly over the ~ask. Grease the bearing surfaces of the lifting pendants and the lifting trunnions of the cask with Never-Seeze.

5.4.44 Lower the beam slowly and guide the trunnion plates past the trunnions until they can be slipped on.

Raise the locking bars, slip the plates over the trunnions and release the locking bars so that they rest on the trunnions inside the trunnion lip thus preventing the plates from coming off .

OP-4.3 Page 66 of 76 NOV 4 1983

.... ~:. ' -/

5.0 Procedure (continued) *,

d ..

5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.45 The cask should be raised carefully until it is clear above the supports. The front will rise about 8 inches before the rear trunnions lift off their supports. If, at this time, it appears necessary to control lateral movement of the cask, ropes should be attached at the trunnions and held on the ground.

5.4.46 The cask shall be raised high enough to clear its supports on the trailer and rotated 90° to align with trailer.

5;4.47 Raise cask to an elevation sufficient to clear the tarpaulin rails and position over trailer.

5.4.48 The cask is lowered onto the trailer. Slight traversing of the crane may be required to center the rear trunnions within~ inch in their supports.

Once the rear trunnions are in contact the cask can be fully lowered.

5.4.49 With the pendants slack, the locking bars can be raised and the trunnion plates removed :rom the trunnions. Raise the horizontal lift beam and traverse to the storage* supports.

5.4.50 Lower the horizontal lift beam onto the supports.

Disengage the hook pin, raise the hook, store the pin .

OP-4.3 Page 67 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure 5.4.51 Position the cask crane to facilitate the installation of the shock absorbing covers.

5.4.52 Perform rear trunnion, front trunnion and trunnion guide assembly tie-down operations per the following instructions:

Required Equipment

- Ratchet

- 3/4 inch socket (front trunnion guide assembly bolts)

- 13/16 inch socket

- Torque wrench (suitable for setting torques of 30 and 125 ft-lbs) 1/8 open end wrench

- Ratchet drive extension 5.4.53 Install the rear trunnion tie-down as follows:

Rear Trunnions 5.4.53.1 Place the trunnion tie-down collars over

. the rear trunnions.

5.4.53.2 Install the two 3/4 inch bolts (with their lock washers) to hand tight.

NOTE: Ensure that the bolt threads contain an acceptable grease coating. Ensure that the bolt lock washers are installed .

OP-4.3 Page 68 *of 76 Nov 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.53.3 Install the rear trunnion support bolts and tighten each to a torque of 125 ft-lb. Repeat for second rear trunnion.

5.4.54 Front Trunnions 5.4.54.1 Swing the binder assembly over the cask trunnion.

5.4.54.2 Verify that the collar is correctly positioned on the trunnion inside shoulder. The position of the collar should be such that it restrains the top

  • half of the trunnion shoulder. If necessary, adjust the collar position, by performing Step 5.4.56.

5.4.54.3 With the binder handle in the up position, engage the binder attachment hook under the trunnion tie-down support lip.*

5.4.54.4 Push the binder handle down to the full down position. Verify that the collar I

is tight against the cask trunnion. If it is not, adjust the tie-down assembly by performing Step 5.4.56

  • OP-4.3 Page 69 of 76 NDV 4 1983 NITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.54.5 Lock the binder in its down position by securing the binder handle restraint chain in the trailer chain securing hook.

5.4.54.6 Repeat Steps 5.4.54.1 through 5.4.54.5 for the second front trunnion.

5.4.55 Trunnion Guide Assembly Installation 5.4.55.1 Swing back the trailer front cradle dust cover plate.

5.4.55.2 Install the trunnion guide assembly around the cask bottom trunnion.

5.4.55.3 Install the two~" bolts with their lock washers.

NOTE: Grease the bolt threads as needed prior to installation.

5.4.55.4 Torque the two~" boits to a torque of 30 ft-lbs.

5.4.56 Front Trunnion Tie-Down Adjustment (N/A if not necessary) 5.4.56.1 Using two* 1-!i;" open end wrenches, adjust the lock nuts which secure the collar to the 3/4" tie-down rod. These nuts should be turned to raise or lower the

  • collar as needed.

OP-4.3 Page 70 of 76 NOV 4 . 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.56.2 Position the tie-down assembly over the trunnion and verify that the adjustment is correct.

5.4.56.3 Tighten lock nuts (upper and lower) tight against the collar and each other to ensure that they do not loosen.

5.4.57 Replace the shock absorbing covers per the following instructions. The weight of each cover is approximately 879 lb.

Required Equipment

- 2 legged sling equipped with connections to allow attachment to the lifting crane hook (bale) and to the cover connecting shackles (loops, etc.).

- 2 connecting shackles

- Ratchet

- Ratchet drive extension 7/8 inch socket Torque wrench suitable for setting torques of 40 and 290 ft-lbs.

- ~ ton chain fall with dynamometer 5.4.57.1 Attach the 2 legged sling to the 2 lifting lugs of the shock absorbing cover by means of the 2 connecting shackles.

OP-4.3 Page 71 of 76 NOV 4 1983 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.57.2 Center the crane auxiliary hook directly over the shock absorbing cover to be handled. There.is no preference in the shock absorbing cover installation sequence; either may be installed first.

Lower the crane auxiliary hook. Attach chain fall and dynamometer assembly to auxiliary hook.

5.4.57.3 Attach the 2 legged sling lifting bale to the dynamometer.

5.4.57.4 Slowly raise the crane auxiliary hook until the sling legs are taut.

5.4.57.5 Transfer the shock absorbing cover to its respective end of the cask.

NOTE: The shock absorbing covers are~ interchangeable.

5.4.57.6 Lower the shock absorbing cover such that its centering pins are in alignment with the cask alignment pin holes. Use chain fall for fine adjustments during alignment

  • OP-4.3 Page 72 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.57.7 Install ~he cover by slowly moving the cover toward the cask face. Care should be taken to ensure that the alignment pin holes are aligned correctly and the covers remain vertical during installation. It is recommended that a dynamometer be used to ensure that excessive force is not applied to the bolts.

.- 5.4.58 Install the four shock absorbing cover bolts and torque them as follows:

5.4.58.1 Install all cover bolts and tighten to hand tight.

5.4.58.2 Tighten all bolts to 40 ft-lb. in the following fashion.

(a) Following the numerical sequence shown in Figure (b), tighten the bolts to 40 ft-lb.

(b) Repeat the cycle until all bolts are torqued to 40 ft-lb.

5.4.58.3 Tighten all cover bolts to the final required torque to 290 ft-lb by following the procedure in 5.4.58.2 (a)

  • and (b).

OP-4.3 Page 73*of 76 NOV 4 1983

~

  • 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.59 Lower the crane auxiliary hook until the 2 legged sling cables are slack.

5.4.60 Remove the shackles from the shock absorbing cover and transfer the crane auxiliary hook and 2 legged sling to the other cover, and attach.

5.4.61 Repeat Steps 5.4.57.4 to 5.4.60 for the other shock absorbing cover.

5.4.62 Store the 2 legged sling, connecting shackles and hand tools and return the crane to the Fuel building. Close roll-up door and Decon building access hatch.

5.4.63 Replace the (6) trunnion impact limiters as follows:

- Ratchet 13/16 inch socket

- Torque wrench suitable for setting torques of 30 ft-lb

- Ratchet drive extension

  1. 1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 5.4.63.1 Manually position the trunnion impact limiter on its respective trunnion.

Note the trunnion impact limiter without gussets is to be installed on the downward facing (in relation to trailer) redundant trunnion (Figure 2).

OP-4.3 Page 74 of 76 NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure- (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.63.2 Install the 9/16" bolt which attaches the limiter to hand tight.

5.4.63.3 Tighten the 9/16" bolt to a torque of 30 ft-lb.

5.4.64 Repeat Steps 5.4.63.1 thru 5.4.63.3 for the remaining impact limiters to be installed.

  • 5.4.65 Perform a cask and trailer contamination survey, recording the results on "Cask Transport Radiation *,*1..

r.

Survey" and "Trailer Departure Radiation Survey" as applicable. Decontaminate as required to meet allowable levels for transport. Complete and retain the forms for documentation requirements.

NOTE: DOT considers a contamination level significant, if when averaged over 300 square centimeters of any part of the package surface, it exceeds 10-4 µ 2

Ci/cm (220 disintegrations per second per square 5 2 centimeter) for beta-gamma and 10- µ Ci/cm (22 disintegra~ions per second per square centimeter for alpha). (49CFR 173.397).

5.4.66 Attach the required regulatory labels to the cask.

OP-4.3 Page 75 of 76

-::"!,:. NOV 4 1983 ITIALS 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.67 Install the trailer protective enclosure as follows:

5.4.67.1 Install any roller track sections, if they were removed to position the cask or cover onto the trailer.

5.4.67.2 Install the trailer protective enclosure by sliding the enclosure rearward by having one man on each side of the trailer grasp the side section of the tarpaulin and pull it towards the rear of the trailer. Slide the enclosure until the tarpaulin is fully extended.

5.4.67.3 Release the back section of the tarpaulin by unbuckling the straps which fasten it to the tarpaulin roof section.

Allow it to unroll.

5.4.67.4 Fasten the rear tarpaulin section to the enclosure sides by buckling the straps along both sides of the rear tarpaulin section

~ ..,* -:/.~,.

~-*...... ~,,

  • 5.0 Procedure (continued) 5.4 Preparation of Cask for Departure (continued) 5.4.67.5 Tie-down the side tarpaulin walls of the protection enclosure by pulling the elastic tie-down rope over the trailer tie-down hooks. Ensure that the rope is taut and firmly restraining the tarpaulin at all tie-down points.

Carefully check the ends of the tie-down rope to assure that they are properly tied and that the rope will not come loose.

5.4.67.6 Verify that all air vents of the protective enclosure are not obstructed (e.g. snow, etc.)

5.4.68 Verify that trailer placards read "Radioactive".

5.4.69 Complete and sign the "Cask Loading Report".

5.4.70 Provide all required shipping documents and a copy of the "Cask Loading Report" to the carrier.

5.4.71 Release the package for transport.

5.4.72 Return all tools and equipment to normal storage.

Completed By:

  • Date:

OP-4.3 ADDENDUM 1 Page 1 of 2 NOV 4 1983 1.0 Lid Gasket Tightness Testing

-.~~*

2.0 Introduction This Addendum provides the procedure to be utilized for verifying the lid gasket tightness by subjecting the interspace between the inner and outer lid gaskets to a pressure rise test using the VDS installed throught the lid gasket pcirt and Connector "D" as shown on Figure 29, Attachment 1.

3.0 Lid Leakage Rate Test Procedure 3.1 Following torqueing of the lid bolts, remove residual water from lid gasket port opeining "D" with an aspirator.

3.2 Connect the VDS in the Lid Tightness Testing Mode as shown on Figure 29 with valves V-13, V-5 and V-7 closed.

3.3 Start the vacuum pump, with gas ballast valve open, open valve V-13 and begin vacuum drying of the lid gasket interspace by throttling valve V-6 to obtain a vacuum reading of approximately 15-20 mbar.

3.4 Continue vacuum drying operations until a vacuum of not less than 10 mbar is obtained as observed on vacuum gauge G-1.

3.5 When the specified vacuum is reached, close valves V-13 and V-6.

Record pressure as measured on gauge G-1 and the time on Form 6 "Cask Loading Leak Tightness Testing Data Sheet".

3.6 Observe the vacuum gauge G-1 for an increase in the test volume pressure for one minute.

3.7 At the end of the one minute, record the observed pressure from gauge G-1 and time on.the Forni. 6 data sheet.

3.8 Based upon the observed pressure rise (6 p) and the testing time, calculate the actual leakage rate" based upon teh formula below and record on the Form 6 data sheet.

3.9 L' = 6P lid 60 (113.52)

~

2 L'lid must be< 3.0 x 10- ATM-CM3 SEC 6P must be MBAR

  • ' ~ ... '*, ;"'\"()

OP-4.3 .

ADDENDUM 1 Page 2 of 2 NOV 4 1983

-2 3.10 If leakage rate is greater than 3.0 x 10 ATM-CC/SEC the test is unacceptable. Refer to the TN-81 shipping cask operating manual

--. for instructions on corrective action and retesting.

NOTE: Leakage Rate Calculation:

The following equation shall be the basis for the above lid leakage determination.

L' = (A p) x (V) ATM (At) 1013 mbar where t = acutal testing time, sec.

p = t.he observed pressure increase (decrease in vacuum) observed during the test mbar.

v = test volume, cm3 (115 cm) 3 L' = actual leakage rate (atm cm3 /s

OP-4.3 ADDENDUM 2 Page 1 of 2

. r: '.f NOV 4 1983 1.0 Cask Tightness Testing 2.0 Introduction This Addendum provides the procedure to be utilized for verifying the cask openings (Shield Plug "A", Blind Flange "B", and DRain Plug "C") are tested to insure that the leaktightness criteria for transport are met. The results of teh test are recorded on the Form 6 Data Sheet.

3.0 Cask Tightness Testing procedure.

3.1 Ensure the VDS is lined up in the evacuation mode as shown in Figure 11.

3.2 Open valves V-6 and V-2, check V-1, V-5 and V-7 closed.

3.3 Start the vacuum pump and evacuate the cask until a vacuum of 20-30 mbar is obtained as observed on G-1.

3.4 Close Valve V-6.

3.5 Wait approximately two minutes to allow the observed pressure on G-1 to stabilize.

3.6 Note the vacuum reading and the time.

a) Vacuum mbar b) Time 3.7 After two minutes, note the following:

a) Vacuum mbar b) Time 3.8 Calculate AP and AT from steps 3.6 and 3.7 above .

OP-4.3

~~~~ [.,
L..~.~ :., G .*~ ADDENDUM 2 Pag~ 2 of 2 l'JOV 4 1983 3.9 Actual Leakage Rate (L') Calculation - Based upon the increase in pressure, as observed on vacuum gauge G-1, over the minimum testing time (tmin) period, or during a longer time, the actual leakage rate (L') of the cask observed during teh tightness test is determined from the following equation:

L'=ful X (V) x atm (t) 1013 mbar where: t = actual testing time in seconds Llp = the observed pressure change (decrease in vacuum) during the test in torr V = testing volume in cm3 L' = actual leakage rate in atm cm3 /sec 3.10 Allowable Leakage Rate (L) - The allowable leakage rate (L) as calculated for a 30-day transport are based upon the calculations provided in the "Safety Analysis Report for TN-8 and TN-9 Packagings," Revision 7, dated September 8, 1976, Annex C to Chapter III, pages 313n through 13lt. The allowable leakage rate for a 30-day transport has been established as:

L = 9.2 x 10-lO atm cm3 /sec .

3.11 If the test reveals that L'-< L, the test is acceptable. Record results on Form 6.

3.12 If Cask Tightness Test is not acceptable (L' > L), refer to the TN-8L Shipping Cask Operating Manual for instructions or corrective action and retesting .

4. Rotate and Lift Cask I I I

I I.

3. Attach 1.ift Beum to II I Casi<

II l )

., I I

i r,"

1. Romove Shock

...__ Absorbl ng Covers Slings t--:*

Shock Absorbing Cover r and Impact Limiters .,*

(

L_-.

L.


.:--Shock Absorbing Cover--)o--j* ~ ~!'act L~~~( r

~i

+*~f-I **

--. 1*

2. Release cask *-H*+-

1* I J ~,t-*-----

Tle-dow n r--r===i==,--,

µ,

LJ

, - - t t1'.--' ---f.

Trailer Loading/Unloading Operations Figure / .

Rear Shock Absorbing Front Cover Shock Lead-'-*--

Absorbing Cover C Front Cover Drum Lifting Lug(2)

A y

Fuel Compartment ( 3)

    • - -~'}--~.

j I M_-

Impact Limiter FJ -~Trunnion J2

[

.- Lid

-Lid I Impact Limiter I

Lid Rec~ss (w/o Gussets) f L,ifting .

'I Lug ( '1)  ;

CASK OVERVIEW Figure~

'I H

.. -;~!-* *.J

. .*.{


~ ,:,

't.....

... d Arm-Locking ..* *,i;

I-~']

Cylinder ~- )

(End view) *.

8'-2" Primary Beam Arm Drive Cylinder 6'-1" Seconda:

Beam Gulde

-+Plate

!/I I \ \11 I" I - f -\+:

i

,)..

~ - - - - - - * - - - : , . : . , - - - - - - 2~

1 1


..,-------___.:J

  • --J=:---.uir!

[g

~ 1 w 'W t-'IGURF! 5 T,i f t Ri:tnm 1\c11:1nmh1"

-
-:,~ ~ C' -* *-.-. *-

f!'-~e/-lT Z

. _::..,..:..i *.:*.:..

~Abt., ,:1r NOV 4 1983 Locking Cylinder

( 2)

Actuating Cylinder

{ 2)

BypassJ Valve (2) lh;---~ .)l To Redundant Beam (as required)

~-----------

~\. Locked Arms Open Lever

~Unlocke (Green)

Arms Closed Air qp (Black)

Controller [j Air Box Cutoff Reset --

1_

Plant Air Supply

  • ~ Schematic of Lift Beam Pneumatic Actuating System Figure 4-

fnT~z IA:6~ S' NOV 4 1983 To Gaseous G-1 v-1rI 0 .

Samole Cylinder ,_

Radwaste Discharge

~

0-,: / :K:-V-3 _ I r

v-2,..

1 .,,..-,,- 2 .i n

  • Blank I

I I.,,ti:

I \

I I

I

'O I .

'!-, I I

I I I I I *1 I

I I I ;2 in. Blank I I I I

I I

I I/ G-3 I Cask I 1 I I

I I I I I Filter V-7 I I I .L I

v-s /

I I I KF-lOT Vac Pum Skid VDS in Sampling Mode Figure,

NOV 4 1983 v1-t l V-9 ,.;

r----------_.,4.-.JL.-..~J- - - . . . \

v-rz.. '\

Connector "A2" I I

0 I I

I I

I 1

To I I Liquid I I

'-' I ., Radwaste Drain/System I I I I I

I I cask I I I I I

I CDS in cask Filling/Cooldown Mode Figure f,

t1!TT~-tlA't6N1 :z Mot: 1 NOV 4 1983

-~

Connector "B" I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I Cask I I I I I I I I I

I Connector "C II a:L-,,-.J,, ___

.-- -- '\

\

~

To

. Liquid Radwaste Drain CDS in Cask Draining Mode Figure 9

I\Tr~,'IIIC/JT I PAbc Y NOV 4 1983 To V-2 Gaseous Radwaste Connector "B" Discharge "Al"

\

0 I

I

,-J

-I I I

I I I I I-I I I I I I

..._, I I

I I I I V-6 I I I I Filter v-7 I I I V ac P ump

.L I

onnector "C" V-5 Drain Bottle Vac Pump Skid VDS in Vacuum Drying Mode Figure IC

\ '

To NOV 4 1983 Gaseous Radwaste v-11

~G-1 0 Samole Cylinder Discharge 4

I (d-,4,Kr v-3 l v-2!

1 Vacuum Hose I

I I

I I

I I

I I

- I I

I

.... I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I I I Cask I I I I i--~--~~V-6 I I I I

I I I Vac Pum I

I I I KF-lOT . .

  • Q'.' L -I I ,-.J

,"---;()

- VDS In Evacuation Mode

.-- Figure //

rt"l'"Tt\Crvt\'t).f'c ..I PAbE' 10 .

NQV 4 1983 KF 50 Vacuum

-- ------ Flange 2" SS Pipe Groove Connector "A-1" Figure t"Z..-

A~Z

  • l1cbE II NOV 4 1983

.'~ "'o;,

, /~'7:?n 2" NPT

.,I I

I 2" ss L._O-Ringl Groove Connector "A-2" .... - ..

Figure I':]

,l/~ME"JJT .Z:.

PkbG:" 1z. ** * -

< \.::; NOV 4 1983 KF 50 Vacuum Flange

.....;...-_-i=__

_I~- - KF 50 Vacuum Flange

  • '1-:-:::ii...----

3/4" SS Pipe t---

I 11------..

\.------11 I I I IL-----'

I

tn 1

I I l I rt-1~.,

View A-A 2.5" O.D.

Tubing J_-:.._-_-=_--:.,

'r-- __ ,.

., ____ .1, Hansen C. --- -::. ~.:r coupling Socket Connector "B" \.

Figure / 4-'

NOV 4 1983 Hansen Couplir.g Socket

"l 3/4" ss Pipe

~

A~

,r,- i-t I )

I I ~

"--+- -t-'

I I A...._j I

I View A-A

  • I r

2.5" O.D. Tubing Hansen coupling Socket Connector "C"

  • Figure l&

f~>~r;.

~ ....... ~ Ri:}'"?gE:'.~i: ~, r'~i-7-~*

NOV 4 1983

~Connection

~--~-~~ for 2" I.D.

Hose i .

    • _________...__ 1

/ 2 " NPT

\

\__O-Ring_ Groove .... -

Connector "J" Figure :f7 1_

  • ~

C* Section AA

( * (

n--11-l

-=t-'

I -I ~ I I h-i-l.,..-Cask Bottom Trunnlons~t-\

i;~*-,, ,, +--,.-

ti--~- r-~--J

~===::..1====!:*~-:<--- Elastic Straps

,* *. . f.,/ "

ti:Z, _;::; ~

Trunnion Position Cut-out to End View Colnslde with Connector "C"

""'l,-.,

ii">,.-** '

~

~-'**y

/

0 I

I n- j rr1 -~

ll-r A

I

(

)0 I

0(, '

1

-~-*-~-- w

~ ~ ~

~f~

~

I t*

Q)

B I

t B

Bottom Protective Cover w

~t Figure l r-

Anr-PtWlEJJT" ~

~~~.*r

....' . '\

. fAbe 1,

  • *~ NOV 4 1983 Tape----

Lateral Guide

{tygon tubing)

Cable Tensioner_,..,.._ Seal of Skirt Ends Detail 1 G)

Handle-~*i=::::J1 Cable (2 loops) 0 Top and Bottom

,~

\ .

  • ~ Protective* Skirt Installation Figure c..D

e Section A*A (enlarged)

C : : : -;j',,

. I '* I

~

Pressure

  • 1, I 2 b - q~i;;-=;t= I *"I i Smooth 1 1 1 c *.

\Rough Surface Surface

  • 1 ~ ,;

Welded , Lateral Gulde '**

Area Tubing, -200" Top and Bollom

- -~--.,,,,

1, 11 (i'

t

,,I',

11 I

N

-- ,,,II: ,r'..

II,,

,,,, 13' Section B-B 11 II (

I' ti c.-_- -

-_-.:.: : . ":..- . --- ::, I II II Protective . Plastic Skirt Figure ~I

\--\

  • I I

Cable Tensioner ( 7)

Protective (Plastic)

IL,(..+41......__ Skirt

~*-o, ***

Cask f't/

~ ,j Lateral! "'

f ,f Guide r

(*

it .i

(

Closure Bars for Protective Skirt Figure 2.~ z 0

~

~

00 w

!it

'\

H

. a,....11.ec*

(

Rotation. Drum II oles ( 15) b*,/'

,.,*.. **: ~

i\ . ~!

(.*.: ?;

Locking l17)

Handle 7 ' *' c~

Cable*

Tensioning

_/Nut (19)

Cable Securing+ 11 0" Ring Screw for Spring+-

(16) Tenslon (18)

B~C-k,_',

Section A*A Section B*B Section C*C Skirt Cable Tensioner

.' Figute 23'

Section AA ltrf~ENTZ PAGE zo NOV 4 1983

(

G)upper Bar See Detail 1

(?'i Lower Bar Cable Tensioner ~ee Detail 2

-=:i,-H,-- - - - =.3-Lateral Guide i- I I

,---r-= _j

. r A I A I

I I

I I

I I I I - I Detail 1 I I L--'-=-L __

I_

Protective Skirt Assembly Figure Z4

NOV 4 1983 3


+ - - - - - ~ - -

14 (a) Lid

--+-------+--------t--

(b) Shock Absorbing Covers

\ .

Lid and Cover Bolt Tightening Sequence Figure z.i,

--- -~----:=:___ Afr~c;,,..~_r-:--\

,~-(-';] * .: . .: e'\-6e_u--: --- ----

'-<;/

,_;; 1983

--J

-J

)

-~-.1*

\I_, ...._

}'

}'

J CA~I(. Ul,,)f..OAOl,...,Q.

AR£ A ( S/-IR(.LC c.J) s N

-Ir

_J._

i

/

  • ---... t:=:::r-7,,'

l.1l"'T1... G- T-'-)~..::1,0..:1$ ---J::~--

U:.6e-I

  • j

\ .

A.

t FuL 7?01..t... Vf L)l>O F°I(;,~ Z..Co

PAI:>£ 2.-3

  • .?

j NOV 4 1983

..)

.._. . }

.J

,/

tJ w "'---~-- 1=

v'S.e L. 11, />.*.c ,=c!l£NCf:

m1111,/t.. re IIV/Jt=J !AS/<. *S Ct+Vlif i*

l -*

_1_

\ .

er 4,3

' f'rTT~~T f p~~ ?A--

NOV 4 1983 To Gaseous Radwaste Discharge

.~

_*.)~

A

'*;,f/

Pirani Gage Head Connector "D" 0

  • V-6 Filter cask V-7 Vac .l..

Pump ,

V-5 Vac Pumo Skid VDS in Lid Tightness Testing Mode Figure 2CJ 148

OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT II Page 1 of 3

~\::/ NOV 4 1983

,. . . ~<? FORM 6 "CASK LOADING LEADAGE RATE TESTING DATA SHEET"

    • ; . J 1.0 Lid Gaskets Leakage Rate Testing - See Addendum 1.

Initial pressure:

.. *~

-:,";]

1.1


mbar Time:

Final pressure:

1.2


mbar Time:

1.3 Test !:,.P:


mbar Test !:,.t:


seconds 1.4 Calculated leak rate:

11 Lid = cm3 /sec


atm 1.5 Verify caluclated leadage rate is less than

. x 1--2 atm cm3/ sec and test is acceptable:

3.0

  • 2.0 Cavity Drying and Dryness Verification 2 .1 Vacuum Drying Operations 2 .1.1 Time:

at start of vacuum drying operations 2 .1. 2 Minimum cold wall temperature (t) as measured by thermocouple "Fl", "F2" or "F3":

Location:

Temperature:


°F 2.1. 3 Water vapor pressure (P) in equilibrium with cold wall temperature, (t):

Vapor pressure:


mbar 2.2 Cavity Dryness Verification 2.2.1 Cavity pressure at beginning of dryness verification:

  • Pressure:

Time:


mbar

OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT II Page 2 of 3

  • 2.0 Cavity Drying and Dryness Verification (continued) NOV 4 1983 2.2 Cavity Dryness Verification (continued) 2.2.2 Cavity pressure at end of dryness verification:

Pressure: mbar Time:

2.2.3 Verify cavity gas pressure rise is no greater then P/4 or 3.3 mbar, whichever is less:

fl p:


mbar fl t:

Test is acceptable:

3.0 Cask Opening Tightness Testing - See Addendum 2.

3.1 Blind Flange "B" Test 3 .1.1 Initial pressure: mbar

  • 3 .1. 2 Time:

Final pressure:

Time:

mbar 3.1.3 Test flP:

Test flt:

3.1.4 Calculated leak rate:

3/

L'"B" = atm cm sec 3.2 "C" Hansen Coupling Plug Test 3.2.1 Initial pressure: mbar Time:

3*. 2 .2 Final pressure: mbar Time:

3.2.3 '!'est flP: mbar

  • Test flt: seconds

i~,...

,.. ' ,.-
--** ............ OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT II Page 3 of 3
  • - 3.0 Cask Opening Tightness Testing (continued) NOV 4 1983
3. 2 *
  • 11 C11 Hansen* coupling Pl*ug Test (continued}

3.2.4 Calculated leak rate:

3 L'

"C" -- - - - - - - - -atm cm /sec 3.3 Shield Plug "A" Test 3.3.1 Initial pressure:


mbar Time:

3.3.2 Final pressure: mbar Time:

3.3.3 Test AP:


mbar Test At:

r. --------seconds 3.3.4 Calculated leak rate:

L' 3 "A" -- - - - - - - - -atm cm /sec 4.0 Total ACutal Leakage Rate 4.1 L' = L'Lid + L'"B" + L'ncn + L'"A" L' =

4. 2 Test is acceptable if:

L' < 9.2 x 10- 2 atm cm3 /sec 4.3 Enter total leakage rate calculate~ above on the Cask Loading Report.

Test is acceptable:

QC:

DATE:

I

.~,-,

OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 1 of 5

  • - '-~ *~, ... - -.. ..,..,.1

.I , ; N.OV 4 1983 CASK DEPARTURE FORMS

OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 2 of 5 NOV 4

  • 1983 "SHIPPER"S CERTIFICATION FOR RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS" Transport No.

Consigned to:

Place of Departure:

Destination:

Shipper:

Proper Shipping Name: Radioactive Material, Fissile, N.O.S.

Number of Packages: One (1)

  • Material Quantity:

Acitivity of Package:


curies Packaging Identification: USA/9015/B( )F Material Class: Radioactive Material Name of Radionuclides: Mixed Fission Products Transport Group to which material belongs: II Category Label Applied: Radioactive Yellow II Transport Index:

Fissile Class of Package: Fissile Class III NOTE: Warning - Fissile Calss III Shipment. Do not load more than one package per vehicle. In loading the storage areas, keep at least 20 feet (6 meters) from other packages, bearing radioactive labels .

-***--.-.----**- **--*--*-*------* *-*--*-----*----*: __________...,.* -**** . -. *.* .. ---~-------*-*--*-----

OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 3 of 5 NOV 4 1983 Description of the physical and chemical form of the material:

Irradiated Fuel Assemblies-*:

Highest dose at the external surface of the package:


mrem/h Highest dose rate at one (1) meter from the surface:


mrem/h Highest dose rate at two (2) meters from surcace of trailer:


mrem/h Maximum level of non-fixed contamination of package and trailer:

4 2 Beta, gamma: 10 Ci/ cm )


( <

Alpha 5 2 10 Ci/ cm )


( < f:.

  • This is to certify that the above named materials are properly classified, described, packaged, marked and labeled, and are in proper condition for transportation according to the applicable regulations of the Department of Transportation.

Shipper's Representative:


(Signature)

Date and hour of departure:

Name(s) of driver(s):

Vehicle Identification Number:

Date and hour of arrival:

Receiver's Signature:

~ ' . . -* ' .. -, -*., -.y OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT III Page 4 of 5 NOV 4 1983 CASK TRANSPORT RADIAITON SURVEY FORM SITE SURVEYED BY: DEPARTURE DATE/TIME CASK SERIAL NO: INSTRUMENT: SURVEY DATE:

PT Contamination Survey Points dpm/100 1 Front Face - left 2 Front FAce - right 3 Lid Surface 4 Front Drum surface - left side 5 Front Drum surface - bottom 6 Front Drum surface - right side 7 Front Drum surface - top 8 Left Trunnion/Impact Limiter 9 Right Trunnion/Impact Limiter 10 Bottom Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter 11 Top Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter 12 Fins - bottom front 13 Fins - top front 14 Fins - right side front 15 Fins - left side front 16 Fins - bottom rear 17 Fins - top rear 18 Fins - right side rear 19 Fins - left side rear 20 Left Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter 21 Right Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter 22 Rear Drum surface - left side 23 Rear Drum surface - right side 24 Rear Drum surface - bottom 25 Rear Drum surface - top 26 Rear Drum base surface - center 27 Rear Drum base surface - left 28 Rear Drum base surface - right 29 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) 30 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside) 31 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) 32 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside)

Radiation Levels (mrem/h)

At Contact 3' From Surface 6' From Surface PT a

b C

d --

' e f

g h

OP-4.3 .

ATTACHMENT III Page 5 of 5 NOV 4 1983 TRAILER DEPARTURE RADIATION SURVEY FORM SURVEYED BY: DEPARTURE DATE TIME:

VEHICLE NO. : INSTRUMENT: SURVEY DATE/TIME:

FIXED REMOVABLE LOCATION mrem/hr dpm/100 1 Cask Drum Support 2 Tarpaulin Support 3 Rear Deck Plate 4 Rear Deck Plate 5 Trunnion Support - Front '

6 Trunnion Support - Front 7 Trunnion Support - Back 8 Trunnion Support - Back 9 Tarpaulin 10 Trailer Beam 11 Trailer Beam 12 Front Deck Plate 13 Front Deck Plate 14 Front Deck Plate I 15 Tire Surface

OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT IV-Page 1 of 3 r~-~ """;!]

,.,1.~* *1 ~ .7 NOV 4 1983

r. .

I-::....-*!.*.

l

  • -::1 ...

H.P. RECEIPT SURVEY FORMS

OP-4.3

1. FORM 1 - CASK RECEIPT RADIAITION SURVEY FORM ATTACHMENT IV Page 2 of 3 NOV 4' 1983 SITE SURVEYED BY: ARRIVAL DATE/TIME CASK SERIAL NO: INSTRUMENT: SURVEY.DATE:

PT Contamination Survey Points dpm/100 1 Front Face - left 2 Front FAce - right 3 Lid Surface 4 Front Drum surface - left side 5 Front Drum surface - bottom 6 Front Drum surface - right side 7 Front Drum surface - top 8 Left Trµnnion/Impact Limiter 9 Right Trunnion/Impact Limiter 10 Bottom Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter 11 Top Redundant Trunnion/Impact Limiter 12 Fins - bottom front 13 Fins - too front 14 Fins - right side front

- 15 16 Fins - left side front Fins - bottom rear 17 Fins - top rear 18 Fins - right side rear 19 Fins - left side rear 20 Left Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter 21 Right Rear Trunnion/Impact Limiter 22 Rear Drum surface - left side 23 Rear Drum surface - ri2ht side 24 Rear Drum surface - bottom 25 Rear Drum surface - top 26 Rear Drum base surface - center 27 Rear Drum base surface - left 28 Rear Drum base surface - right 29 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) 30 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside) 31 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (inside) 32 Front Shock Absorbing Cover (outside)

Radiation Levels (mrem/h)

At Contact 3' From Surface 6' From Surface

~T a

b C

d e

f 2

h

?","'*.~

.,. ,I , ,

OP-4.3 f: *:)J\l . :=*!,*::; ;,:[ ATTACHMENT IV

  • !:>*_ ;;;*;: { Page 3 of 3 NOV 4 1983 TRAILER RECEIPT RADIATION SURVEY FORM SURVEYED BY: ARRIVAL DATE/TIME:

INSTRUMENT: SURVEY DATE/TIME:

FIXED REMOVABLE LOCATION mrem/hr dpm/100 1 Cask Drum Suooort 2 Tarpaulin Support 3 Rear Deck Plate 4 Rear Deck Plate 5 Trunnion Support - Front 6 Trunnion Support - Front.

7 Trunnion Support - Back 8 Trunnion Support - Back 9 Tarpaulin 10 Trailer Beam 11 Trailer Beam 12 Front Deck Plate 13 Front Deck Plate 14 Front Deck Plate 15 Tire Surface

- - ---- ------**--------*--- -------~---------

~ - -------- ------------

OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT V

____ : -- *** "-. .:..:.1 *u

~-j; [

Page 1 of S NOV 4 1983 CASK LOADING REPORT

  • --*=*-*---------- - -----~-----r--*--*-

OP-4.3 .

ATTACHMENT V Page 2 of 5 NOV 4 1983 CASK LOADING REPORT 1.0 Cask Loading 4.1 The following is a list of the fuel assemblies and isert components (if applicable) that have been loaded into the cask. The fuel assembly I.D. and ANSI numbers (if applicable) and their associated spent fuel cask locations have been verified by Fuel Resources personnel (See Section 5.3.22).

F.R. Representative Signature Date SHIPMENT NUMBER ..

SPENT FUEL FUEL ASSEMBLY FUEL ASSEMBLY INSERT COMPONENT CASK LOCATION I.D. NUMBER ANSI NUMBER I.D. NUMBER 1

2 3

NOTE: Lid orientation mark is adjacent to #3 fuel cavity.

Refer to Attachment I Fig. 28.

F/A I.D. DECAY TOTAL WEIGHT OF WEIGHT OF NUMBER HEAT ACTIVITY FISSLE URANIUM FISSLE PLUTONIUM KW CURIES GRAMS GRAMS

-~ -----------*

  • .~ 'C!f ATTACHMENT V
    • -*.*.:..;? l Page 3 of 5
  • 2.0 Cask Preparation for Shipment 2.1 2.2 Cavity dryness verification test satisfactory Record final cask cavity internal pressure:

NOV 4 1983


*psia 2.3 Maximum dose rate at cask surface:

a) beta, gamma (8 ):


mrem/h b) location:

2.4 Maximum dose rate at three (3) feet from cask surface:

a) beta, gamma (8 ):


mrem/h b) location:

2.5 Maximum removable surface contamination of the cask surface:

2 a) alpha, beta, gamma ( ): dpm/ 100cm b) location:

2. 6 Maximum removable surface contamination of the trailer:

2 a) alpha, beta, gamma ( ): dpm/100cm b) location:

2.7 Maximum dose rate at the outer surface of the vehicle, (as measured along the trailer protective enclosure perimeter) with the cask installed:

a) beta, gamma (8 .):


mrem/h b) location:

OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT V Page 4 of 5 NOV 4 . 1983 2.0 Cask Preparation for Shipment (continued) 2.8 Maximum dose rate at six (6) feet from the outer surface of the vehicle:

a) beta, gamma ca ):

mrem/h b) location:

2.9 Maximum dose rate inside the truck cab:

beta, gamma <a a) ):


mrem/h b) location:

NOTE: Attach complete radiation and contamination forms to this report.

2.10 Cask Departure: TIME: _____________

DATE:

OP-4.3 ATTACHMENT V Page 5 of 5 NOV 4 1993

3. 0 Remarks:

(

QC Inspector:

Data Recorder:

Date Time Responsible Supervisor: